Patent Grant
8542835
The present invention generally relates to a method and system for mobile communication and especially relates to a method and system adapted to transmission of various sorts of data in accordance with the development of multimedia.
Conventionally, portable telephones have been widely spread, and TDMA (time division multiple access) and FDMA (frequency division multiple access) were used for access methods for portable telephones. In these days, CDMA (code division multiple access) is being adopted instead of TDMA and FDMA because of various merits, such as high efficiency at usage of frequency band, facility of change of transmission rate, and preservation from eavesdropping.
However, CDMA according to prior art is prepared mainly for voice transmission and therefore is not suitable for data communication. In recent years, as the development of multimedia, not only voice but also various kinds of data that can be processed in computers and so on should be transmitted. Therefore, communication access between mobile stations and network should be suitable for transmitting various types of data in the near future.
It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a method and system for mobile communication suitable for transmitting various types of data in accordance with the development of multimedia.
The present invention provides a method for mobile communication carried out among a plurality of mobile stations and a network, personal identifiers being previously and respectively assigned to the mobile stations, the method comprising the steps of: assigning temporary identifiers respectively to mobile stations which are communicable with the network; storing the personal identifiers and the temporary identifiers of the mobile stations by the network; storing the personal identifier and the temporary identifier of each mobile station by the mobile station; detecting by the network that one of the temporary identifiers stored in itself is different from that stored in the corresponding mobile station; and reassigning by the network another temporary identifier to the mobile station of which the former temporary identifier stored in the network is detected to be different from that stored in the corresponding mobile station.
By virtue of the above invention, it is possible to provide a method and system for CDMA wireless communication suitable for transmitting various types of data in accordance with the development of multimedia.
The present invention provides a base station controller communicating with a mobile station, which is able to conduct diversity reception, via a plurality of radio base stations under control of a switching center, the controller comprising enciphering means for enciphering transmitted information, which has been received from the switching center and should be transmitted to the mobile station, so as to generate enciphered transmitted information.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station controller communicating with a mobile station, which is able to conduct diversity reception, via a plurality of radio base stations under control of a switching center, the controller comprising: retransmission-control-information-adding means for adding retransmission control information to enciphered transmitted information which has been previously enciphered by the switching center; and transmitting means for transmitting the enciphered transmitted information with the retransmission control information to the radio base stations.
Additionally, the present invention provides a switching center communicating with a mobile station, which is able to conduct diversity reception, via a plurality of radio base stations and a base station controller, the switching center comprising enciphering means for enciphering transmitted information, which should be transmitted to the mobile station, so as to generate enciphered transmitted information.
In addition, the present invention provides a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the system being characterized in that the base station controller enciphers information, which should be transmitted from the side of the switching center to the side of the mobile station, before distributing the information to the radio base stations.
Additionally, the present invention provides a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the system being characterized in that the switching center enciphers information, which should be transmitted from the side of the switching center to the side of the mobile station, before distributing the information to the radio base stations.
In addition, the present invention provides a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the system comprising layer-2-enciphering-means for enciphering information that should be processed only in one or more layers which are the same as or higher than layer 2 of the OSI reference model.
Additionally, the present invention provides a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the system comprising: layer-3-enciphering-means for enciphering information that should be processed only in one or more layers which are the same as or higher than layer 3 of the OSI reference model; and layer-2-mutual-notifying-means for facilitating notification between layers of different devices corresponding to layer 2 of the OSI reference model about an onset of transmission of enciphered information.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the system comprising: layer-3-enciphering-means for enciphering information that should be processed only in one or more layers which are the same as or higher than layer 3 of the OSI reference model; retransmission-control-information-adding means, at a layer corresponding to layer 2 of the OSI reference model, for adding retransmission control information to information which has been previously enciphered by the layer-3-enciphering means; and transmitting means for transmitting the enciphered transmitted information with the retransmission control information to the radio base stations.
In addition, the present invention provides a method for controlling a base station controller communicating with a mobile station, which is able to conduct diversity reception, via a plurality of radio base stations under control of a switching center, the system for mobile communication comprising the step of enciphering transmitted information, which has been received from the switching center and should be transmitted to the mobile station, so as to generate enciphered transmitted information.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a method for controlling a base station controller communicating with a mobile station, which is able to conduct diversity reception, via a plurality of radio base stations under control of a switching center, the method comprising the steps of: adding retransmission control information to enciphered transmitted information which has been previously enciphered by the switching center; and transmitting the enciphered transmitted information with the retransmission control information to the radio base stations.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a method for controlling a switching center communicating with a mobile station, which is able to conduct diversity reception, via a plurality of radio base stations and a base station controller, the method comprising the step of enciphering transmitted information, which should be transmitted to the mobile station, so as to generate enciphered transmitted information.
Additionally, the present invention provides a method for controlling a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the method comprising the step of, at the base station controller, enciphering information, which should be transmitted from the side of the switching center to the side of the mobile station, before transmitting the information to the base station controller.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a method for controlling a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the method comprising the step of, at the switching center, enciphering information, which should be transmitted from the side of the switching center to the side of the mobile station, before distributing the information to the radio base stations.
In addition, the present invention provides a method for controlling a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the method comprising the step of enciphering information that should be processed only in one or more layers which are the same as or higher than layer 2 of the OSI reference model.
Additionally, the present invention provides a method for controlling a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the method comprising the steps of: enciphering information that should be processed only in one or more layers which are the same as or higher than layer 3 of the OSI reference model; and facilitating notification between layers of different devices corresponding to layer 2 of the OSI reference model about an onset of transmission of enciphered information.
The present invention provides a method for controlling a system for mobile communication including a mobile station which is able to conduct diversity reception, a plurality of radio base stations, and a base station controller communicating via the radio base stations under control of a switching center, the method comprising the steps of: enciphering information that should be processed only in one or more layers which are the same as or higher than layer 3 of the OSI reference model; adding retransmission control information at a layer corresponding to layer 2 of the OSI reference model to information which has been previously enciphered by the enciphering step; and transmitting the enciphered transmitted information with the retransmission control information to the radio base stations.
By virtue of the invention as described above, it is possible for a mobile station to conduct diversity reception although the mobile station cannot simultaneously process enciphered transmission signal and non-enciphered transmission signal.
In addition, the present invention provides a mobile station communicating with a network over the air, comprising decipherment-onset-time-setting-means for setting a time to start deciphering an enciphered reception signal dependently on a time to start enciphering a transmission signal in the network and independently of a time to start enciphering a transmission signal in the mobile station.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a mobile station further comprising deciphering means for deciphering an enciphered reception signal received from the network over the air, the decipherment-onset-time-setting-means including encipherment-onset-request-determining means for determining if a reception encipherment onset request is received from the network or not; and decipherment-instructing means for instructing the deciphering means to start deciphering in accordance with a time when the reception encipherment onset request has been received on the basis of the determination.
Additionally, the present invention provides a mobile station communicating with a network over the air, comprising encipherment-onset-time-setting-means for setting a time to start enciphering a transmission signal independently of a time to start deciphering an enciphered reception signal.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a mobile station further comprising transmission-encipherment-onset-requesting means for transmitting a transmission encipherment onset request to the network over the air; and enciphering means for enciphering the transmission signal so as to generate an enciphered transmission signal, the encipherment-onset-time-setting-means including encipherment-instructing means for instructing the enciphering means to start enciphering in accordance with a time when the transmission encipherment onset request has been transmitted.
In addition, the present invention provides a controller in a network communicating with a mobile station over the air, comprising decipherment-onset-time-setting-means for setting a time to start deciphering an enciphered reception signal dependently on a time to start enciphering a transmission signal in the mobile station and independently of a time to start enciphering a transmission signal in the controller.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a controller in a network further comprising deciphering means for deciphering an enciphered reception signal received from the mobile station over the air, the decipherment-onset-time-setting-means including encipherment-onset-request-determining means for determining if a reception encipherment onset request is received from the network or not; and decipherment-instructing means for instructing the deciphering means to start deciphering in accordance with a time when the reception encipherment onset request has been received on the basis of the determination.
The present invention provides a controller in a network communicating with a mobile station over the air, comprising encipherment-onset-time-setting-means for setting a time to start enciphering a transmission signal independently of a time to start deciphering an enciphered reception signal.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a controller in a network further comprising transmission-encipherment-onset-requesting means for transmitting a transmission encipherment onset request to the mobile station over the air; and enciphering means for enciphering the transmission signal so as to generate an enciphered transmission signal, the encipherment-onset-time-setting-means including encipherment-instructing means for instructing the enciphering means to start enciphering in accordance with a time when the transmission encipherment onset request has been transmitted.
Additionally, the present invention provides a system for mobile communication comprising a mobile station and a network communicating with each other over the air,
the network comprising: encipherment-onset-requesting means for transmitting an encipherment onset request to the mobile station over the air; first-enciphered-transmission-signal-generating means for enciphering a first transmission signal which should be transmitted from the network to the mobile station after the transmission of the encipherment onset request, thereby generating a first enciphered transmission signal; first-enciphered-transmission-signal-transmitting means for transmitting the first enciphered transmission signal to the mobile station; response determining means for determining if an encipher onset response by the mobile station indicating that the encipherment onset request is acceptable is received or not; and first deciphering means for starting to decipher a second enciphered transmission signal from the mobile station on the basis of the determination of the response determining means when the mobile station accepts the encipherment onset request,
the mobile station comprising: request determining means for determining if the encipherment onset request is received or not; encipherment-onset-responding means for transmitting the encipherment onset response on the basis of the determination of the request determining means when the encipherment onset request is accepted; second deciphering means for starting to decipher the first enciphered transmission signal from the network when the encipherment onset request is accepted; second-enciphered-transmission-signal-generating means for enciphering a second transmission signal which should be transmitted from the mobile station to the network after the transmission of the encipherment onset response, thereby generating a second enciphered transmission signal; and second-enciphered-transmission-signal-transmitting means for transmitting the second enciphered transmission signal to the network.
In addition, the present invention provides a method for controlling a mobile station communicating with a network over the air, comprising the step of setting a time to start deciphering an enciphered reception signal dependently on a time to start enciphering a transmission signal in the network and independently of a time to start enciphering a transmission signal in the mobile station.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a method for controlling a mobile station, further comprising the step of deciphering an enciphered reception signal received from the network over the air, the step of setting a time to start deciphering including the steps of determining if a reception encipherment onset request is received from the network or not; and instructing to start the deciphering step in accordance with a time when the reception encipherment onset request has been received on the basis of the determination.
Additionally, the present invention provides a method for controlling a mobile station communicating with a network over the air, comprising the step of setting a time to start enciphering a transmission signal independently of a time to start deciphering an enciphered reception signal.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a method for controlling a mobile station, further comprising the steps of transmitting a transmission encipherment onset request to the network over the air; and enciphering the transmission signal so as to generate an enciphered transmission signal, the step of setting a time to start enciphering including the step of instructing to start the enciphering step in accordance with a time when the transmission encipherment onset request has been transmitted.
In addition, the present invention provides a method for controlling a controller in a network communicating with a mobile station over the air, comprising the step of setting a time to start deciphering an enciphered reception signal dependently on a time to start enciphering a transmission signal in the mobile station and independently of a time to start enciphering a transmission signal in the controller.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a method for controlling a controller in a network further comprising the step of deciphering an enciphered reception signal received from the mobile station over the air, the step of setting a time to start deciphering including the steps of determining if a reception encipherment onset request is received from the network or not; and instructing to start the deciphering step in accordance with a time when the reception encipherment onset request has been received on the basis of the determination.
Additionally, the present invention provides a method for controlling a controller in a network communicating with a mobile station over the air, comprising the step of setting a time to start enciphering a transmission signal independently of a time to start deciphering an enciphered reception signal.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a method for controlling a controller in a network further comprising the steps of transmitting a transmission encipherment onset request to the mobile station over the air; and enciphering the transmission signal so as to generate an enciphered transmission signal, the step of setting a time to start enciphering including the step of instructing to start the enciphering step in accordance with a time when the transmission encipherment onset request has been transmitted.
In addition, the present invention provides a method for controlling a system for mobile communication in which a mobile station and a network communicate with each other over the air, the method comprising the steps of: transmitting an encipherment onset request from the network to the mobile station over the air; enciphering a first transmission signal which should be transmitted from the network to the mobile station after the transmission of the encipherment onset request, thereby generating a first enciphered transmission signal; transmitting the first enciphered transmission signal to the mobile station; determining if an encipher onset response by the mobile station indicating that the encipherment onset request is acceptable is received or not; starting to decipher a second enciphered transmission signal from the mobile station on the basis of the determination of the response determining step when the mobile station accepts the encipherment onset request; determining if the encipherment onset request is received or not; transmitting the encipherment onset response on the basis of the determination of the request determining step when the encipherment onset request is accepted; starting to decipher the first enciphered transmission signal from the network when the encipherment onset request is accepted; enciphering a second transmission signal which should be transmitted from the mobile station to the network after the transmission of the encipherment onset response, thereby generating a second enciphered transmission signal; and transmitting the second enciphered transmission signal to the network.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, although the structural elements in the network are not provided with the function to read both of enciphered and non-enciphered signals simultaneously as simplifying the system, the timing of the encipherment onset is aligned in the base station and the network, so that the communication between the mobile station and the network can be facilitated surely and smoothly.
Additionally, the present invention provides a mobile station communicating with a network over the air, comprising encipherment-procedure-notifying-means for notifying the network about encipherment-procedure-specifying-information specifying one or more possible encipherment procedures of the mobile station.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a mobile station, wherein the encipherment-procedure-notifying-means further including enciphering-key-generation-procedure-notifying-means for notifying the network about enciphering-key-generation-procedure-specifying-information specifying one or more possible enciphering key generation procedures of the mobile station.
In addition, the present invention provides a mobile station communicating with a network over the air, comprising encipherment communication means for conducting an encipherment procedure corresponding to an encipherment request given by the network and for communicating with the network.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a mobile station, wherein the encipherment communication means includes enciphering-key-generating-means for generating an enciphering key corresponding to enciphering-key-generation-procedure-specifying-means specifying an enciphering key generation procedure notified by the network; and enciphering means for conducting an encipherment procedure using the enciphering key generated by the enciphering-key-generating-means.
Additionally, the present invention provides a controller in a network communicating with a mobile station over the air, comprising encipherment-procedure-selecting means for selecting an encipherment procedure for communication in accordance with encipherment-procedure-specifying-information, specifying one or more possible encipherment procedures of the mobile station, notified by the mobile station; and encipherment requesting means for notifying the mobile station about an encipherment request requesting the mobile station to conduct an encipherment using the encipherment procedure selected by the encipherment-procedure-selecting means.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a controller in a network further comprising enciphering-key-generation-procedure-selecting-means for selecting an enciphering key generation procedure in accordance with enciphering-key-generation-procedure-specifying-information, specifying one or more possible encipherment procedures of the mobile station, notified by the mobile station; and enciphering-key-notifying means for notifying the base station about the enciphering key generation procedure selected by the enciphering-key-generation-procedure-selecting-means.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, it is possible to select the encipherment procedure adapted to the security level instructed by the mobile station or the mobile station user, thereby conducting the encipherment procedure. It is also possible to select the encipherment procedure adapted to the multimedia service for transporting voice or moving picture from the mobile station or the network, thereby conducting the encipherment procedure. Furthermore, if it is necessary to enhance the security level for future extension of communication systems and for newly executed services, it will be possible to readily introduce a newly developed encipherment procedure. In addition, if a plurality of networks are provided with the ability for conducting one or more common encipherment procedures, it is possible to conduct one of the encipherment procedures when the mobile station roams across the service areas of the networks although all of the possible encipherment procedures are not commonly shared. Even in this case, it is also possible in each network to conduct one or more original encipherment procedures.
The present invention provides a method for controlling access links between a mobile station and a network, characterized in that a plurality of branches are established between the network and the mobile station upon a call attempt to or from the mobile station located at a position where the mobile station can communicate using diversity handover, the plurality of branches including a main branch and at least one auxiliary branch for additional use in order that the mobile station may communicate using diversity handover, thereby enabling the mobile station to commence the diversity handover using the plurality of branches.
In addition, the present invention provides a mobile station characterized in that it establishes a plurality of branches between the network and the mobile station upon the reception of a message from the network when no access link is established between the network and the mobile station, the message including a request for establishing the branches, thereby commencing the diversity handover using the plurality of branches.
Additionally, the present invention provides a base station controller characterized in that it establishes a plurality of branches between a network and a mobile station upon a call attempt to or from the mobile station at a location where the mobile station can communicate using diversity handover, the plurality of branches including a main branch and at least one auxiliary branch for additional use in order that the mobile station may communicate using diversity handover.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station controller characterized in that it transmits a message to both of a base station and a mobile station upon a call attempt to or from the mobile station at a location where the mobile station can communicate by means of intra-cell diversity handover wherein the mobile station and the base station communicate with each other using a plurality of branches, the message including a request for establishing a plurality of branches including a main branch and at least one auxiliary branch for additional use in order that the mobile station may communicate by means of intra-cell diversity handover.
Additionally, the present invention provides a base station controller characterized in that it transmits a message to a plurality of base stations upon a call attempt to or from the mobile station at a location where the mobile station can communicate by means of inter-cell diversity handover wherein the mobile station communicates with the plurality of base stations, the message including a request for establishing a plurality of branches between the mobile station and the corresponding base stations.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station characterized in that it establishes a plurality of branches between the base station and the mobile station according to an instruction from a base station controller upon a call attempt to or from the mobile station at a location where the mobile station can communicate by means of intra-cell diversity handover wherein the mobile station and the base station communicate with each other using the plurality of branches, the plurality of branches including a main branch and at least one auxiliary branch for additional use in order that the mobile station may communicate by means of intra-cell diversity handover, thereby enabling the mobile station to commence the intra-cell diversity handover.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, when there is the mobile station at a location where it can communicate by means of intra-cell diversity handover wherein the mobile station and the base station communicate with each other using the plurality of branches, a series of procedures for establishing the main branch and for adding the auxiliary branch can be carried out upon the call attempt to or from the mobile station. Therefore, the number of signal flows can be reduced, so that it is possible to transit diversity handover condition efficiently and to decrease the interference to other radio access links.
The present invention provides a method for controlling a branch replacement characterized in that at least a current branch between a network and a mobile station are replaced with a plurality of branches necessary for communication using diversity handover when the branch replacement is necessary for the mobile station and when it is recognized that the mobile station can commence communicating using diversity handover if the branch replacement is carried out, thereby enabling the mobile station to commence diversity handover.
Additionally, the present invention provides a mobile station characterized in that it replaces at least a current branch between a network and the mobile station with a plurality of branches necessary for communication using diversity handover when a branch replacement is necessary for the mobile station and when the mobile station can commence communicating using the diversity handover branches if the branch replacement is carried out, thereby commencing diversity handover.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station controller characterized in that it replaces at least a current branch between a network and a mobile station with a plurality of branches necessary for communication using diversity handover when a branch replacement is necessary for the mobile station and when it is recognized that the mobile station can commence communicating using diversity handover if the branch replacement is carried out, thereby enabling the mobile station to commence diversity handover.
Additionally, the present invention provides a base station controller characterized in that it transmits a message to a base station and a mobile station when a branch replacement is necessary for the mobile station and when it is recognized that, if the branch replacement is carried out, the mobile station can commence communicating by means of intra-cell diversity handover wherein the mobile station and the base station communicate with each other using a plurality of branches, the message including an instruction to carry out the branch replacement and an instruction to add at least one auxiliary branch for additional use in order to communicate using diversity handover.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station controller characterized in that it transmits an instruction to a plurality of base stations and a message to a mobile station when a branch replacement is necessary for the mobile station and when it is recognized that the mobile station can commence communicating by means of inter-cell diversity handover if the branch replacement is carried out, the instruction instructing the base stations to set branches necessary for the diversity handover, the message including an instruction to carry out the branch replacement and an instruction to add at least one auxiliary branch for additional use in order to communicate using diversity handover.
Additionally, the present invention provides a base station characterized in that it replaces a branch for a mobile station and adds at least one auxiliary branch for the mobile station according to instructions of a message once the base station receives the message from a base station controller, the message including an instruction to carry out branch replacement and an instruction to add at least one auxiliary branch for additional use in order to communicate using diversity handover, thereby commencing the intra-cell diversity handover.
The aspects of the invention as set forth replaces the current branch or branches with the branches adapted to diversity handover upon a trigger for the branch replacement when it is recognized that the diversity handover can be commenced if the branch replacement is conducted. Therefore, the number of signal flows can be reduced, so that it is possible to transit diversity handover condition efficiently and to decrease the interference to other radio access links.
The present invention provides a branch controlling method for a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a new call occurs while the mobile station treats an existent call, at least either of branch structures for both of the calls or at least either of communication frequency bands for both of the calls is controlled, so that the branch structures are the same as each other and the communication frequency bands are the same as each other.
In addition, the present invention provides a branch controlling method for a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a new call occurs while the mobile station treats an existent call, a branch structure and a communication frequency band being the same as those for the existent call are assigned to the new call.
Additionally, the present invention provides a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a new call occurs while the mobile station treats an existent call, the mobile station uses a branch structure being the same as that for the existent call to the new call and a communication frequency band being the same as that for the existent call to the new call in accordance with an instruction from a network.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station controller adapted for a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a new call occurs while the mobile station treats an existent call, the base station controller controls at least either of branch structures for both of the calls or at least either of communication frequency bands for both of the calls, so that the branch structures are the same as each other and the communication frequency bands are the same as each other.
Additionally, the present invention provides a base station controller adapted for a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a new call occurs while the mobile station treats an existent call, the base station controller assigns a branch structure and a communication frequency band being the same as that for the existent call to the new call.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, it is possible to assign the same branch structure and the same frequency band for the plurality of calls including the existent and new calls, so as to ease the control for both of the calls.
The present invention provides a branch controlling method adapted for a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a new call occurs while the mobile station treats an existent call and when it is impossible to assign a branch structure or a communication frequency band, being the same as the branch structure or the communication frequency band for the existent call, to the new call, another branch structure or another communication frequency band which can continue both of the existent and new calls is selected, and the selected branch structure or communication frequency band is assigned to both of the existent and new calls.
The present invention provides a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a new call occurs while the mobile station treats an existent call and when it is impossible to assign a branch structure or a communication frequency band, being the same as the branch structure or the communication frequency band for the existent call, to the new call, the mobile station assigns another branch structure or another communication frequency band, which can continue both of the existent and new calls, to both of the existent and new calls in accordance with an instruction from a network.
The present invention provides a base station controller adapted for a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a new call occurs while the mobile station treats an existent call and when it is impossible to assign a branch structure or a communication frequency band, being the same as the branch structure or the communication frequency band for the existent call, to the new call, the base station controller selects another branch structure or another communication frequency band which can continue both of the existent and new calls, and assigns the selected branch structure or communication frequency band to both of the existent and new calls.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, it is possible to assign the same branch structure and the same frequency band for the plurality of calls including the existent and new calls, so as to ease the control for both of the calls.
The present invention provides a branch controlling method adapted for a mobile station, characterized in that when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls, a branch structure or a communication frequency band which can continue all of the calls is selected, and the selected branch structure or communication frequency band are assigned to all of the calls commonly.
The present invention provides a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously, characterized in that when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls, the mobile station, according to an instruction from a network, alters a branch structure or a communication frequency band for all of the calls to a new branch structure or a new communication frequency band for all of the calls commonly.
The present invention provides a base station controller adapted for a mobile station, characterized in that when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls, the base station controller selects a branch structure or a communication frequency band which can continue all of the calls, and assigns the selected branch structure or communication frequency band to all of the calls commonly.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, it is possible to assign the same branch structure and the same frequency band for the plurality of calls during communicating although handover is carried out, so as to ease the control for all of the calls.
The present invention provides a branch controlling method adapted for a mobile station, characterized in that when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls and when there is not a branch structure which can continue all of the calls in relation to the mobile station or when there is not a communication frequency band which can continue all of the calls in relation to the mobile station, another branch structure or another communication frequency band which can continue a plurality of calls being high in priority among the calls are selected; the other call or calls are released; and the selected branch structure and communication frequency band are assigned to the priority calls.
In addition, the present invention provides a mobile station characterized in that when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls and when there is not a branch structure which can continue all of the calls in relation to the mobile station or when there is not a communication frequency band which can continue all of the calls in relation to the mobile station, the mobile station, according to an instruction from a network, releases a call or calls being low in priority; and assigns a branch structure and a communication frequency band selected by the network to a plurality of calls being high in priority.
Additionally, the present invention provides a base station controller adapted for a mobile station, characterized in that when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls and when there is not a branch structure which can continue all of the calls in relation to the mobile station or there is not a communication frequency band which can continue all of the calls in relation to the mobile station, the base station controller selects another branch structure and another communication frequency band which can continue a plurality of calls being high in priority among the calls; releases the other call or calls; and assigns the selected branch structure and communication frequency band to the priority calls.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, it is possible to continue the calls with a high priority when the trigger for handover occurs although there are not a branch structure and a communication frequency band which can continue all of the calls. In other words, it is possible to continue at least the calls with a high priority although there are not ample wireless communication resources.
In addition, the present invention provides a method for establishing a control channel in a mobile communication system wherein a mobile station treats a plurality of calls using a plurality of sets of wireless communication resources, characterized in that a single control channel is established between the mobile station and a network for transporting control information therebetween in a manner that the control channel is formed by one of the sets of wireless communication resources which are being used for a plurality of calls by the mobile station.
By virtue of the invention, it is possible to reduce the number of hardware elements for transporting control information in comparison with the case that all of the plurality of calls utilize control channels, respectively. In addition, it is possible to exclude complicated control procedures, e.g., management of the transportation order of control information in the plurality of control channels.
Additionally, the present invention provides a method for controlling to replace a control channel, characterized in that while a mobile station treats a plurality of calls using a plurality of sets of wireless communication resources and transmits or receives control information to or from a network via a single control channel formed by one of the sets of the wireless communication resources, and when a first call using the control channel formed by one of the sets of the wireless communication resources should be released and a second call should be continued, the control channel, which is formed by one of the sets of the wireless communication resources and should be released, is replaced with a new control channel formed by another set of the wireless communication resources, thereby continuing to control the second call.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station controller, characterized in that while a mobile station treats a plurality of calls using a plurality of sets of wireless communication resources and transmits or receives control information to or from a network via a control channel formed by one of the sets of the wireless communication resources, and when a first call using the control channel formed by one of the sets of the wireless communication resources should be released and a second call should be continued, the controller replaces the control channel, which is formed by one of the sets of the wireless communication resources and should be released, to a new control channel formed by another set of the wireless communication resources, thereby continuing to control the second call.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, while a mobile station transmits or receives control information with respect to a plurality of calls via a common control channel, and when a first call using the control channel formed by one of the sets of the wireless communication resources should be released and a second call should be continued by means of another set of the wireless communication resources, the control channel is replaced. Accordingly, after the replacement, by means of the new control channel, it is possible to continue the transportation of control signal for the second call.
The present invention provides a method for determining a radio zone and an uplink transmission power, characterized in that
each of base stations transmits broadcast information indicating a perch channel transmission power level and an uplink interference level via a corresponding perch channel; and
a mobile station receives the broadcast information from near base stations around the mobile station;
detects respective reception levels of the perch channels for the near base stations;
calculates respective path losses between the mobile station and respective near base stations on the basis of the respective reception levels and the respective perch channel transmission power levels within the broadcast information;
calculates respective necessary uplink transmission power levels between the mobile station and respective near base stations on the basis of the calculated respective path losses, the respective uplink interference levels within the broadcast information, and required signal-to-interference ratios involved in reception by the near base stations;
selects a radio zone in which the necessary uplink transmission power level is minimum among the respective necessary uplink transmission power levels, the base station of the selected radio zone being ready for communication with the mobile station or being able to commence communication with the mobile station after handover; and
controls an uplink transmission power in the selected radio zone based on the necessary uplink transmission power level of the selected radio zone.
Additionally, the present invention provides a base station comprising means for transmitting broadcast information indicating a perch channel transmission power level and an uplink interference level via a perch channel.
In addition, the present invention provides a mobile station characterized in that it
receives broadcast information from near base stations around the mobile station via respective perch channels, the broadcast information from each of the near base stations indicating a perch channel transmission power level and an uplink interference level;
detects respective reception levels of the perch channels for the near base stations;
calculates respective path losses between the mobile station and respective near base stations on the basis of the respective reception levels and the respective perch channel transmission power levels within the broadcast information;
calculates respective necessary uplink transmission power levels between the mobile station and respective near base stations on the basis of the calculated respective path losses, the respective uplink interference levels within the broadcast information, and required signal-to-interference ratios involved in reception by the near base stations;
selects a radio zone of which the necessary uplink transmission power level is minimum among the respective necessary uplink transmission power levels, the base station of the selected radio zone being ready for communication with the mobile station or being able to commence communication with the mobile station after handover; and
controls an uplink transmission power in the selected radio zone based on the necessary uplink transmission power level of the selected radio zone.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, although perch channel transmission power levels for respective base stations are different from each other or one another, it is possible to optimize the uplink transmission power of the mobile station.
The present invention provides a handover controlling method for additionally establishing a handover branch between a mobile station and a network, characterized in that a procedure for additional establishment of a branch is completed with a state transition to which the mobile station can commence communicating without waiting for a confirmation of synchronization for all branches.
The present invention provides a handover controlling method further characterized in that the procedure for additional branch establishment is completed with confirmation of synchronization for one branch among the branches established for the mobile station.
Additionally, the present invention provides a mobile station characterized in that if the mobile station has received a request from a network to establish a new additional branch between the network and the mobile station, the mobile station establishes the new branch and then starts diversity reception upon reception of a signal through the new branch.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station characterized in that if the base station has received a request from a base station controller to establish a new additional branch between a mobile station and the base station for carrying out intra-cell diversity handover, the base station additionally establishes the new branch and then starts intra-cell diversity reception upon reception of a signal through the new branch.
Additionally, the present invention provides a base station characterized in that if the base station has received a request from a base station controller to establish a new additional branch between a mobile station and the base station for carrying out inter-cell diversity handover, the base station establishes the new branch and then starts sending the received signals to the base station controller that executes inter-cell diversity reception upon reception of a signal through the new branch.
In addition, the present invention provides a base station controller characterized in that when the base station controller establishes a new additional branch between a mobile station and a network, the base station controller provides a request for establishing the new branch and then completes a procedure for additional establishment of the new branch without waiting for a confirmation of synchronization for all branches between the mobile station and the network.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a base station controller further characterized in that it provides the request for establishing the new branch being necessary for inter-cell diversity handover, and then starts inter-cell diversity reception upon reception of signals through the branches being necessary for inter-cell diversity handover.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, since the procedure for additional establishment of the new branch is completed when the mobile station can communicate, the additional establishment procedure can be ended in a short time period.
The present invention provides a radio mobile communication system wherein a plurality of channels can be established on a single carrier frequency by code division multiplex access, characterized in that the system comprises code-resource-assigning means for assigning at least a part of an assignable code resource to one of the channels in accordance with a transmission rate necessary for the corresponding channel, the part corresponding to a certain bandwidth corresponding to the transmission rate.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a radio mobile communication system further comprising channel-assigning means for assigning one of the channels, to which a part of the assignable code resource is assigned, to a mobile station in accordance with a transmission rate necessary for the mobile station.
Additionally, the present invention provides a radio mobile communication system wherein a plurality of channels can be established on a single carrier frequency by code division multiplex access, characterized in that the system comprises a plurality of assignable code resources, each of the code resources corresponding to a certain bandwidth and being independent of the other code resources; and reassigning means for reassigning a part of an assignable code resource to one of the channels to which a part of another assignable code resource is already assigned if there is not an unused code resource corresponding to a bandwidth suitable for a necessary transmission rate when assigning an unused assignable code resource to one of the channels in accordance with the necessary transmission rate.
Additionally, the present invention provides a radio mobile communication system further comprising unused-code-resource determining means for determining if there is an unused code resource corresponding to a bandwidth suitable for a necessary transmission rate or not when assigning an unused assignable code resource to one of the channels in accordance with the necessary transmission rate necessary.
Furthermore, the present invention provides a radio mobile communication system, wherein at least one standard code resource corresponding to a predetermined bandwidth is preselected and the system comprises assignment-possibility-determining means for determining at predetermined moments if there is at least one unused standard code resource or not, the reassigning means reassigning a part of an assignable code resource to one of the channels to which a part of another assignable code resource is already assigned until an unused standard code resource is reserved if the determination result by the assignment-possibility-determining means has been negative.
In addition, the present invention provides a radio base station for which a plurality of channels can be established on a single carrier frequency by code division multiplex access, characterized in that it comprises code-resource-assignment-possibility-determining means for determining whether or not it is possible to assign at least a part of an assignable code resource to one of the channels in accordance with a transmission rate necessary for the corresponding channel, the part corresponding to a certain bandwidth corresponding to the transmission rate.
The present invention provides a base station controller further comprising channel-assigning means for assigning a channel, to which a part of assignable code resource is assigned, to a mobile station in accordance with a transmission rate necessary for the mobile station.
Additionally, the present invention provides a method for controlling a radio mobile communication system wherein a plurality of channels can be established on a single carrier frequency by code division multiplex access, characterized in that the method comprises code-resource-assigning step for assigning at least a part of an assignable code resource to one of the channels in accordance with a transmission rate necessary for the corresponding channel, the part corresponding to a certain bandwidth corresponding to the transmission rate.
In addition, the present invention provides a method for controlling a radio mobile communication system including a plurality of assignable code resources, each of code resources corresponding to a certain bandwidth and being independent of the other code resources, a plurality of channels being capable of being established on a single carrier frequency by code division multiplex access, characterized in that in order to assign an unused assignable code resource to one of the channels in accordance with a necessary transmission rate, the method comprises the steps of determining whether or not there is an unused code resource having a code resource length in accordance with the necessary transmission rate; and reassigning a part of an assignable code resource to one of the channels to which a part of another assignable code resource is already assigned if the determination indicates that there is not an unused code resource having a bandwidth suitable for the necessary transmission rate.
Additionally, the present invention provides a method for controlling a radio base station for which a plurality of channels can be established on a single carrier frequency by code division multiplex access, characterized in that it comprises a code-resource-assignment-possibility-determining step for determining whether or not it is possible to assign at least a part of an assignable code resource to one of the channels in accordance with a transmission rate necessary for the corresponding channel, the part corresponding to a certain bandwidth corresponding to the transmission rate.
In addition, the present invention provides a method for controlling a radio base station comprising a channel-assigning step for assigning a channel, to which a part of an assignable code resource is assigned to a mobile station in accordance with a transmission rate necessary for the mobile station.
By virtue of the aspects of the invention as set forth, it is possible to minimize the number of reassignments or rearrangements of code resources for channels, and call generations do not involve the rearrangement of code resource. Therefore, it is possible to reduce connection time delay.
1. General Description of System
1.1. Introduction
This system is a mobile communications system wherein W-CDMA (wide-band code division multiple access) is adopted for the radio access manner in order to enhance efficiency for frequency utilization, to process multiplexed and high-rate signals flexibly, and to improve the communication quality to the level equivalent to fixed networks.
1.2 Entire System Structure
First, with reference to
1.3 Abbreviations
Glossary of the abbreviations used in the present specification is indicated in
2. Access Interfaces
2.1 General Description of Access Interfaces
Chapter 2 prescribes access interfaces of W-CDMA mobile communications system. The access interfaces in this system include, as shown in
To prescribe the interfaces, this chapter includes the following items:
1) Services Provided by the System and the System Capabilities in Compliance with the Protocols
2) System Functional Structure and Control Manners for Realizing the Services and System Capabilities
3) Rules for Reference Model Structure and Interfaces in Compliance with the Protocols
4) Physical Architecture and Physical Condition of the Radio Interface
5) Signal Transfer Protocol for the Radio Interface (Layer-2)
6) Control Protocol for the Radio Interface (Layer-3)
7) Physical Architecture and Electrical Condition of the BS-MCC Interface
8) Information Transmission Protocol for the BS-MCC Interface (ATM Layer and AAL type-2)
9) Signal Transfer Protocol for the BS-MCC Interface (AAL)
10) Control Protocol for the BS-MCC Interface (Layer-3)
The control manners and protocol specifications described in this chapter comply with recommendation drafts Q.FNA, Q.FIF, Q.FSA, and Q.FSR prepared on the basis of the discussions at TTC IMT-2000 Study Committee, Network Aspect ad hoc.
2.2 Features of Access Interfaces
Next, features of access interfaces will be described.
2.2.1 Handover
A plurality of radio zones are arranged in a mobile communications system and each zone is provided with a base station. To start communication between one of the base stations and a mobile station, a kind of wireless channel called a perch channel is employed. More specifically, a plurality of perch channels of which the frequency bands are different from each other are established between the base station and the mobile station for selecting one of traffic channels for actual communication. That is to say, the traffic channel TCH for transporting voice or messages is selected by virtue of the perch channels.
When a mobile station MS travels across the boundary of radio zones, lowered is the level of the electric field of the radio wave received from the base station of the zone from which the mobile station has exited, thereby depreciating the communication quality. Accordingly, it is necessary for the mobile station to alter the currently communicating base station to a new base station from which the reception is more excellent, so that the traffic channel TCH employed by the mobile station MS is replaced. This replacement is called handover.
In order to facilitate handover, it is preferable that the frequency band of the former traffic channel TCH and that of the new traffic channel TCH are the same with each other. In accordance with traditional mobile communications, a mobile station MS measures the respective levels of the electric fields of in relation to circumferential perch channels and selects candidate base stations for handover. The mobile station then informs the network of a handover request designating the candidate base stations for handover.
However, if the traffic channel TCH of the same frequency band as that of the currently communicating channel is not preselected for candidate cells in circumferential zones, it is impossible that the cells serve the mobile station although the mobile station has transmitted the handover request. Therefore, it is necessary for the network to exclude, from the candidate cells, the cell without preselection of traffic channel TCH of the same frequency band as that of the currently communicating traffic channel in accordance with the prior art.
Accordingly, in the present system, the mobile station MS sends the network a handover request wherein previously excluded is the cell that does not preselect the traffic channel TCH at the same frequency band as the current communication. Next, this feature will be described with reference to
On the contrary, according to the present communications system, broadcasting information indicating the preselection condition of the traffic channels TCH with reference to the respective circumferential zones is informed to the mobile station MS as will be described at section 2.5.2.4.2.6. Using the broadcasting information, the mobile station recognizes the zone in which the traffic channel TCH at the same frequency band as the current communication is not preselected, so as to exclude the recognized zone from the handover candidates. Therefore, the mobile station MS in the embodiment informs the network of the handover request designating that the primary candidate zone is zone 3 and the secondary candidate is zone 4.
As will be described in section 2.3.2.2.4, the present communications system can carry out a handover branch addition, handover branch deletion, and branch replacement handover. The above-discussed procedure in view of the preselection status of traffic channel may be carried out at the handover branch addition and the branch replacement handover.
With reference to
As shown in
MRRC excludes the zone to which the traffic channel is not preselected on the basis of the broadcast information, and ranks the zones in strength order with reference to the same frequency band as the current communication. Then, MRRC rearranges the remaining zones in order of strength rank, the remaining zones being the candidates for handover; generates a NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION TRIGGER request indication designating the strength order of the remaining zones; and sends the NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION TRIGGER request indication to TACF in the network via RRC.
The notification of non-soft handover execution trigger requirement to TACF triggers the handover. Then, the network selects the base station among the candidate base stations in order to execute the handover and notifies the mobile station MS about the selected base station, thereby activating the traffic channel in relation to the base station. Accordingly, it is possible for the network to exclude complicated control procedures, e.g., detection procedure of the frequency band that the mobile station MS uses for communication and determination procedure as to whether the traffic channel TCH of the same frequency band is preselected by the candidate zone or not. Subsequent operation following the handover trigger is illustrated in
2.2.2 Replacement of ACCH
Associated control channel (ACCH) is a kind of control channel utilizing the same radio resources as those for the traffic channel TCH that is used for voice or data transportation. By means of ACCH, control signals may be transported between the mobile station MS and base station BS.
There is a kind of communications system wherein one mobile station MS can treat a plurality of calls simultaneously. In addition, there is another kind of communications system wherein one mobile station MS realizes a call using a plurality of radio physical channels. These systems are suitable for radio bearer services. In these kinds of systems, sometimes it is necessary that control signals may be transported between the mobile station MS, which is treating the plurality of calls, and base station BS.
For this purpose, it would be possible to form ACCHs corresponding to all of the plurality of calls for transporting control signals, ACCHs being constituted of wireless communication resources which are also utilized by the traffic channels.
However, this technique needs many hardware elements for transporting control signals and complicated control procedures for managing the transportation order of control signals in the plurality of ACCHs.
Accordingly, in the present communications system, when the mobile station treats a plurality of calls using a plurality sets of wireless communication resources which are also being utilized by a plurality of traffic channels, one set of the wireless communication resources is selected and then the control channel, which uses this set, is established between the mobile station and the base station for transporting the control information therebetween.
The method for establishing ACCH in the communications system will be described next in more detail.
Therefore, by virtue of the system, it is possible to reduce the number of hardware elements for transporting control signals in comparison with the case that all of the plurality of calls respectively utilize multiple ACCHs, corresponding to the multiple traffic channels. In addition, it is possible to exclude complicated control procedures, e.g., management of the transportation order of control information in the plurality of ACCHs.
In the system shown in
Accordingly, in addition to sharing the single ACCH by the multiple traffic channels for realizing the multiple calls simultaneously by the single mobile station MS, when the single set of wireless communication resources involved in the single ACCH is released, the ACCH is replaced by another ACCH.
As shown in
The base station BS includes functional entities called BCFr1 and BCFr2 while the network includes a functional entity called TACF which functions as a base station controller (BSC). BCFr1 and BCFr2 respectively control the radio bearers for the first and second calls and execute to activate and release the corresponding ACCHs. TACF controls the access and instructs to activate and release the ACCHs.
Assume that the second call utilizing the traffic channel TCH2 should be continued while the first call utilizing the traffic channel TCH1 is ended. The ACCH replacement procedure will be described in the sequential diagram in
In the procedure, first, once the first call utilizing the traffic channel TCH1 is ended, the traffic channel TCH1 is released. Once TACF detects the release trigger of the traffic channel TCH1, TACF determines whether ACCH1 on the same physical channel as the traffic channel TCH1 is used or not. In addition, TACF determines whether an ACCH is necessary for continuing the traffic channel TCH2 although the traffic channel TCH1 is released.
If those determinations are affirmative, TACF sends BCFr2, which is in charge of the second call, an activation request for ACCH2 that is accompanying with the traffic channel TCH2. In response, BCFr2 activates ACCH2. Then, BCFr2 sends a completion report indicating the completion of the activation of ACCH2 to TACF.
Upon the completion report, TACF informs TACAF of a replacement request for switching to ACCH2. The reception of the replacement request causes TACAF to inform BACF2 of an establishment request for ACCH2, so that BCAF2 establishes ACCH2. Additionally, TACF informs BCAF1 of a release requirement for ACCH1, so that BCAF1 releases ACCH1.
Next, TACAF sends TACF a replacement completion report indicating the completion of the replacement of ACCH. Then, TACF informs BCFr1 of a request for releasing ACCH1, so that BCFr1 releases ACCH. Consequently, the ACCH replacement is completed, so that transportation of control information between the mobile station and the network may be accomplished via ACCH2, which uses the same radio resources as the traffic channel TCH2. The ACCH replacement procedure will be described again in more detail at section 2.4.3.5.7.
2.2.3 Procedures for Encipherment Onset Moment Notification
Since mobile communications are carried out over the air, signals are sometimes ciphered (encoded into cipher) at the source terminal to be preserved from intercept or manipulation by a third party. The destination terminal deciphers the ciphered signals (decodes them to make out the meaning).
However, in communication of the enciphered signals (control signals), if the onset moment of the encipherment is unclear, it is impossible to decipher smoothly. That is, if the onset time of the decipherment may he misestimated, the meaning of signals cannot be made out.
With reference to
In this system, since the respective base stations execute the encipherment processes, there is likelihood that the onset moment of the encipherment varies among the base stations. It is possible in theory to align the encipherment onset moment among the base stations, but difficult in practice. More specifically, the base station controller RNC should negotiate with the radio base stations BS1 to BS3 in advance for matching the encipherment onset time. However, it is difficult in practice to prevent the timing error completely.
As described above, it is necessary that the same kind of signal (i.e., enciphered transmission signal or non-enciphered transmission signal) should be transmitted from all of the base stations BS1 to BS3 for realizing the diversity combining at the mobile station. However, layer 1 of the OSI reference model supervises between the mobile station and the respective base stations although layer 3 supervises between the mobile station MS and the base station controller RNC or between the mobile station MS and the mobile service switching center MSC.
Accordingly, as shown in
Therefore, it is an object to provide a communications system wherein even a type of mobile station, which cannot process in parallel an enciphered signal and non-enciphered signal, can carry out diversity reception securely. In the system, the mobile station MS and the mobile communications control center MCC mutually inform of the encipherment moment, so as to appropriately decipher for errorless communication.
With reference to the functional model in
The network on the other hand includes functional entities called SACF, TACF, LRCF, and LRDF. SACF is connected with MCF to function as an interface with the mobile terminal for realizing services that are not related to calls. TACF is connected with TACAF to control the access processes to the mobile station terminal, e.g., the origination, paging, and so on. LRCF is connected with TACF and SACF to control mobility management. LRDF stores various data on mobility management.
With such a structure, prior to the mutual notification of the encipherment onset, a user authentication procedure (refer to section 2.4.5.1) is executed as shown in
Then, mutual notification of the encipherment onset time is carried out in accordance with the sequence shown in
Next, TACAF and MCF of the mobile terminal send a START CIPHERING response confirmation to TACF and SACF of the network, this confirmation indicating that mobile station will next start to transmit enciphered signals. Consequently, the network entities can recognize that the succeeding signals transmitted from the mobile terminal will be ciphered. After the transmission of the START CIPHERING response confirmation, TACAF and MCF of the mobile terminal cipher succeeding signals according to a preselected encipherment procedure using a preselected ciphering key. Once the terminal entities receive the enciphered signal, TACF and SCF decipher the received signals. Accordingly, the uplink signal transmitted from the mobile terminal can be transported in secret and interpreted by only the network.
Next, it will be discussed which kind of information should be ciphered. In the invented system, the source device can freely decide the information to be ciphered as long as the destination device is notified of the ciphered information and communications at layers 1 through 3 are established.
It is known that open system interconnection protocols should be adapted to the open system interconnection reference model illustrated in FIG. 263. The OSI model defines the hierarchy consisting of seven functional layers for managing various functions from physical interconnection to application.
The lowest layer, layer 1 is called the physical layer. The physical layer prescribes mechanical or electrical procedures or means, for example, configurations of connection plugs.
Layer 2, datalink layer operates to establish, maintain, and release an individual data link and to detect and recover the error occurring in the physical layer.
Layer 3, network layer sets up and manages an end-to-end connection between different networks, whereby the upper layers can proceed their respective functions without processing for the network type.
Layer 4, transport layer controls the transparent end-to-end data relaying service between session entities.
Layer 5, session layer establishes or releases the session connection.
The sixth or presentation layer negotiates agreeable technique for data encoding and punctuation.
The seventh or application layer identifies the communicating source and instructs the service quality.
The international telecommunication union (ITU) scribes the line circuit interface at layer 3 that corresponds to layers 3 through 7 in the OSI reference model.
The relationship of the OSI reference model and the present system will be described in more detail with reference to
The system illustrated in
i) Both of the mobile station MS and the base station controller RNC can carry out diversity reception and distribution.
ii) Layer 1 of the OSI reference model for the radio channel supervises between the mobile station MS and the respective base stations BS.
iii) Layer 2 of the OSI reference model for the radio channel supervises between the mobile station MS and the base station controller RNC.
iv) Layer 3 of the OSI reference model for the system supervises between the mobile station MS and the base station controller RNC or between the mobile station MS and the mobile service switching center MSC.
In addition, Layer 2 should meet the following functional conditions:
i) At the source, it has a function to retransmit layer-2-frames
ii) At the destination, it has a function to reassemble layer-3-frames from received layer-2-frames in the regular order even if a layer-3-frame was divided into a plurality of layer-2-frames at the source.
iii) At the destination, it does not have a function to interpret a ciphered signal and non-ciphered signal both corresponding to the same information when it receives them simultaneously.
Under the above-mentioned conditions, assume that layer 2 conducts the encipherment procedure on layer 2. In this case, as shown in
The network application then sends an encipherment onset request to the layer-2-cipherer/decipherer of the mobile station MS via the layer-2-cipherer/decipherer of the network at step S5. Afterward, the application of the mobile service switching center MSC makes the layer-2-cipherer/decipherer of the base station controller RNC carry out the encipherment process, whereby the signal transmitted from the layer-2-cipherer/decipherer are enciphered.
In the mobile station MS, the encipherment onset indication is transferred from layer-2-cipherer/decipherer to layer-2-controller at step S6, to layer 3 at step S7, and finally to the application at step S8. Upon the reception of the encipherment onset indication, the application of the mobile station instructs or sets the layer-2-cipherer/decipherer to decipher the transmitted signal from the network at step S9.
If the second layer conducts the encipherment process under the abovedescribed conditions, the encipherment is started at the network before the signals are distributed to the radio base stations BS for diversity handover in the network. Therefore, the mobile stations can receives the ciphered signals from the respective base stations, thereby achieving diversity handover surely even if it cannot process in parallel an enciphered signal and non-enciphered signal.
However, in this case, it is possible that the application of the mobile station requests the layer-2-cipherer/decipherer to decipher signals (Step S9) simultaneously with the retransmission request from the layer-2-controller in the mobile station to the network (Steps, 510 to 512). If the network begins to retransmit the requested signals (Steps S13 and S14) before the completion of the decipherment set-up in the layer-2-cipherer/decipherer, the layer-2-cipherer/decipherer will not decipher the enciphered signal and transfer it as it is to the layer-2-controller. In this case, the layer-2-frame sequence number of the signals may not be interpreted. This phenomenon is caused from that although layer 2 (datalink layer) detects errors occurring at layer 1 (physical layer) referring to CRCs attached to the signal frames and facilitates the retransmission, layer 2 also provides the encipherment procedures.
This results in problems: the first problem is that the retransmitted layer-2-frames cannot be utilized, and the second problem is that it is impossible to reassemble layer-3-frames from received layer-2-frames in the regular order if a layer-3-frame was divided into a plurality of layer-2-frames at the source.
Accordingly, it is preferable that the mutual notification of the encipherment onset (transmission of START CIPHERING request indication and START CIPHERING response confirmation) is conducted at the layer which is layer 3 or higher rather than layer 2 in the OSI reference model. Therefore, in the system, a ciphered is only information that should be processed only in one or more layers which are the same as or higher than layer 3 of the OSI reference model although the mutual notification of the encipherment onset time is conducted at layer 2.
Consequently, although normal reception is not achieved by an error occurring in layer 1 (physical layer), the retransmission can be made out by the error detection and retransmission in layer 2 independently of layer 1. The retransmission causes the reception of the non-received signals in the proper order by the destination. Therefore, the destination can recognize the encipherment onset time at an improved precision. However, if the reliability of layers 1 and 2 can be improved, it is possible to cipher at layer 2.
2.2.4 Reassignment of TMUI
In the system, an IMUI (international mobile user identity) is already assigned to each of the mobile stations. Each mobile station stores the corresponding IMUI while the network stores a plurality of IMUI of the mobile stations. Communication may be carried out using the IMUIs, but they can be intercepted by a third party since mobile communications may be achieved by the air interface. This results in that the third party can communicate using the intercepted IMUI.
Therefore, in the present system, the network assigns another identity, namely, TMUI (temporary mobile user identity) to each of the mobile stations that is communicable with the network and notifies the corresponding mobile station about TMUI. More specifically, the TMUI is enciphered to be preserved from being intercepted, and then transmitted through the air interface to the mobile station.
The assignment of TMUI is conducted at the location registration procedure. If the location registration procedure is failed, the location registration procedure should be repeated again. Therefore, confusion of TMUI at each mobile station will not occur in theory. However, if a machine storing TMUI in a mobile station or the network malfunctions, such confusion of TMUI and IMUI may occur.
In this case, recovery process is needed for correcting the confusion. Therefore, the system adopts the following procedures, which should be carried out by the network and the mobile station MS.
As mentioned above, TMUI is assigned to each mobile station MS communicable with the mobile communications control center MCC and each mobile station MS stores its TMUI. Therefore, once mobile stations MS receive the broadcast TMUI, each mobile station determines whether the broadcast TMUI is coincident with the TMUI stored therein. If the determination is affirmative, only the corresponding mobile station MS sends a paging response to the mobile communications control center MCC at step S2.
Next, the network checks the authenticity of the user (see section 2.3.2.4.1). More specifically, the network generates a necessary authentication information (random number) for checking the authenticity of the accessing mobile station MS and transmits it to the mobile station MS at step S3. Once the mobile station MS receives the authentication information, the mobile station MS executes an arithmetic operation based on the authentication information (random number) and transmits the authentication calculation result as an authentication response at step S4. The authentication calculation uses an authentication key stored in each mobile station MS previously. The network stores the authentication keys of the respective users at its storage device (e.g., SDF) in a manner that the respective authentication keys are associated with the respective IMUIs and TMUIs for finding the correlation.
Then, the network reads out the authentication key corresponding to the temporary mobile user identity used for the paging at step S1. Next, the network executes the authentication calculation on the basis of the read authentication key and the authentication information (random number) transmitted at step S3, and determines whether or not this calculation result is coincident with the calculation result by the mobile station MS at step S5. If the determination is affirmative (the results are coincident), the mobile station MS is authenticated (the mobile station belongs to a proper subscriber and is the proper call destination). Afterward, a normal incoming call acceptance procedure is executed.
However, if the determination is negative (the results are not coincident), the mobile station MS is not the call destination. Such a discord is caused from that the replying mobile station MS is fraudfull or TMUI managed by the network and TMUI managed by the proper subscriber's mobile station became discord with each other accidentally. Accordingly, the network checks the authenticity of the mobile station using the international mobile user identity.
Specifically, first the network (in fact, the mobile communications control center) transmits an IMUI transmission request to the mobile station MS for instructing it to transmit the IMUI at step S6. In response, the mobile station MS notifies the IMUI stored in itself.
The network then generates the random number again as the authentication information and sends it to the mobile station MS. In response, the mobile station MS uses the authentication information and the authentication key stored in itself to execute an authentication calculation and sends the authentication calculation result as an authentication response to the network at step S9.
The network then accesses to the storage device thereof and reads out the authentication key corresponding to the IMUI obtained at step S7. Next, the network executes the authentication calculation on the basis of the read authentication key and the authentication information (random number) transmitted at step S8, and determines if this calculation result is coincident with the calculation result by the mobile station MS or not at step S10. If the determination at step S10 is negative (the results are not coincident), the mobile station MS is completely fraudfull, so that the radio channel between the network and the mobile station MS is disengaged, thereby finishing the communication at step S12.
On the contrary, if the determination at step S10 is affirmative (the results are coincident), the mobile station MS can be considered to belong to a proper subscriber, but its TMUI was altered accidentally. Thus, the mobile communications control center MCC reassigns TMUI at step S11. In other words, as long as the mobile station MS belongs to a proper subscriber, it can obtain TMUI again and afterward it can communicates with the network by means of the newly assigned TMUI although the former TMUI has been changed to null accidentally. However, since the mobile station is not a call destination in fact (although the mobile station belongs to a proper subscriber), the radio channel between the network and the mobile station is disconnected, so that the communication is ended at step S12.
As described above, according to this reassignment of TMUI, although TMUI stored in the network and TMUI stored in the mobile station MS is different, the network can recognize that mobile station MS belongs to a proper subscriber as long as the IMUI is correct and can reassign the new TMUI to the mobile station MS. Therefore, although the former TMUI has been changed to null accidentally, the mobile station can be returned quickly to the normal condition in which it can communicate normally.
Furthermore, when the location of the mobile station is registered or the mobile station request the call origination as well as the incoming call acceptance described above, the authentication using the TMUI is conducted. In this case, the reassignment of the TMUI is conducted if necessary. In the network, the TMUIs are managed by SDF, which will be described later. SDF can be, for example, arranged in a location register for managing various information on subscribers in the network.
2.3 Brief Description of System
Next, the system will be described briefly.
2.3.1 Provided Services
This system can totally provide various information transfers including voice transfer and data transfer. This system can also provide one mobile station with a plurality of bearer services at the same time. For example, the single mobile station can benefit by two unrestricted digital bearer services at 64 kbps simultaneously.
Furthermore, unlike the traditionally PDC mobile communications system, the wire communication meets the requirements of ATM and the radio communication meets the requirements of CDMA, whereby transfer is achieved at improved quality and improved velocity.
2.3.1.1 Bearer Services
This system can provide the following bearer services.
(1) Circuit Switching Mode
a) Voice Bearer Service at 8 kbps
This bearer service is provided for supporting voice services. The digital signals at the Um reference point comply with ITU-T recommendation G.729.
However, the bit transparency is not ensured. This bearer service will not be utilized for voice-band data communication. The features of the voice bearer service at 8 kbps are listed in
b) Unrestricted Bearer Service at 64 kbps
This bearer service provides information transfer at 64 kbps, the information being not changed between the Um reference points. The features of the unrestricted bearer service at 64 kbps are listed in
c) Multiplex-Rate Unrestricted Bearer Service at n×64 kbps (n is a natural number, e.g., 6)
This bearer service provides information transfer at 384 kbps wherein subrate information is multiplexed with one another, the subrate information being not changed between the Um reference points. The features of the multiple-rate unrestricted bearer service are listed in
(2) Packet Switching Mode (Should be Studied Further)
This system can provide bearer services at the packet switching mode in addition to those at the circuit switching mode.
2.3.1.2 Mobility Service
In order to facilitate the mobility or portability services, international mobile user identity (IMUI) is adopted. IMUI is previously assigned to each of the mobile stations for identifying the respective mobile stations. Each mobile station stores its IMUI while the network mobile communications control center MCC stores a plurality of IMUIs of the mobile stations that are served by the network. When one mobile station moves to a next radio zone, the IMUI of the mobile station is utilized for the location registration and handover, so as to enable the mobile station to communicate irrespectively of its location.
2.3.1.3 Quality Requirements
This system enables error correction coding and retransmission functions.
Therefore, the average bit-error rate in the network and the air interface is ensured to be less than 10−3 in relation to voice transfer. In relation to transfer of information, e.g., data or control information other than voice, the average bit-error rate is ensured to be less than 10−6.
2.3.2 System Capabilities
2.3.2.1 System Capabilities on Connection Services
2.3.2.1.1 Origination
“Origination” is a series of controlling procedures for setting up the intra-network and network-MS access links necessary for communicating with a called terminal and for setting up connection to the called terminal on the basis of an access of a calling mobile station upon a call attempt by the user of the calling mobile station. “Origination” procedures include an SDCCH control, user identity retrieval, user authentication, encipherment-onset time notification, establishment of access link, mutual information transfer to and from the calling user terminal, and analysis.
The system comprises the following capabilities for the origination procedures. First, it is possible to establish an SDCCH (stand-alone dedicated control channel) to inform the network of the call attempt by the mobile station MS. SDCCH will be described later in more detail at the section entitled “SDCCH Control” of this chapter.
Furthermore, in order to establish the association (terminal association) between the mobile station and the network, the system comprises the following functions.
a) The network is notified of the call attempt indicating the temporary mobile user identity (TMUI) of a calling mobile station by the mobile station, thereby setting up the terminal association. In addition, the network is informed of feature capabilities of the mobile station by the mobile station and the information on the capabilities is stored in the network, so that the network controls to allow or reject the another call attempt to the mobile station.
b) The network recognizes the calling mobile station, which has requested the call attempt, and transfers unique information about the calling mobile station from a network data base to analyzing functional entities and control functional entities. If the network cannot recognize the temporary mobile user identity (TMUI) the calling mobile station, the network sends an inquiry about the international mobile user identity (TMUI) to the calling mobile station for recognition.
c) The user authentication of the mobile station is executed as described above. The user authentication will be described in more detail at the section entitled “User Authentication” of this chapter.
d) In order to preserve signals transmitted through the control channel and the information channel between the mobile station and the network from being intercepted and manipulated by a third party, signals are ciphered. The encipherment will be described in more detail at the section entitled “Encipherment” of this chapter.
e) The mobile station is informed of successes and failures of the above-mentioned respective procedures.
In addition, the network is informed of the services required by the calling mobile station after the establishment of the terminal association. In addition, the network informs the calling mobile station of the acceptance of the call attempt after the establishment of the terminal association.
Additionally, a call origination control function is informed of an instance of the terminal association control function, whereby they are associating with each other.
The mobile station informs the network of the environmental radio condition around the mobile station when the calling mobile station sends the call attempt, whereby the network recognizes the condition.
Upon the reception of the call attempt from the mobile station, the user profile of the originating terminal is retrieved and analyzed, so that the services that can be provided for the originating terminal are determined.
On the basis of the analysis of on the call attempt from the mobile station, appropriate network resources, for instance, voice coder-decoders, data trunks, and wired channels in the network are captured, set up, and activated.
The access link for the traffic channel and the associated control channel, which are suitable for the services requested by the calling mobile station, can be established (refer to the section entitled “Access Link Establishment” in this chapter).
Once the associated control channel is established, the SDCCH transferring previously the control signals is released. The release of the SDCCH will be described in more detail at the section entitled “SDCCH Control” in this chapter.
The called user terminal is requested to communicate with the originating user terminal. While the called terminal is requested to communicate, the originating user terminal is informed of the calling to the called user terminal and the response from the called user terminal.
The calling or called mobile terminal, for which the call has been established, can originate another call (additional call). However, since the mobile terminal has been already authenticated, the authentication process is not carried out for the additional call.
In addition, although a call has been established between terminals, another call requested from a third party may be established
2.3.2.1.2 Incoming Call Acceptance
“Incoming call acceptance” is a series of controlling procedures wherein the networks calls a destination user mobile station upon a service request from a calling user terminal, and receives the response from the destination user mobile station so that access-links within the network and between the network and the mobile station are established, and connection between those mobile stations are established for the communication between the calling and destination user terminals. “Incoming call acceptance” procedures include paging, SDCCH control, user identity retrieval, user authentication, encipherment-onset time notification, routing in the network, establishment of access link, mutual information transfer to and from the called user terminal, and analysis.
The system comprises the following capabilities for the termination procedures.
First, the network receives a call attempt from a calling user terminal which may be a subscriber terminal of this system or another system connected thereto. Then, the network retrieves the profile of the called user terminal on the basis of the mobile user identity of the coded user terminal. Therefore, the network can obtain various information necessary for analyzing the services which can be provided for the called user terminal, for analyzing the condition of the called user terminal, for determining if paging is necessary or not, for determining the areas for the paging, and for establishing the terminal association between the network and the called user terminal. Then, the paging function entity of the network is activated for paging. However, the paging is not carried out for the additional call.
The called mobile station is called by means of the mobile user identity of this mobile station. The network can recognize the responding mobile station. Usually, in this procedure, TUMI may be used for the mobile user identity. If the network detects an abnormality of the TMUI, the IMUI uniquely given to the mobile station is used. The paging procedure may be realized by the following capabilities.
a) The network recognizes the area or areas where the called mobile station is paged, and then determines the paging channels used for the paging. Then, the network distributes a paging signal to intra-network nodes (base terminal systems). In response, each BTS transmits a paging signal in its coverage sector for paging the called mobile station within the necessary area.
b) An SDCCH is established in order that the mobile station sends the network a response to the paging. This feature will be described in more detail at the section entitled “SDCCH” control in this chapter.
c) Once the called mobile station sends the network the response to the paging, the terminal association between the called mobile station and the network is activated. In addition, the response signal can be identified by a paging ID corresponding to the calling signal. Furthermore, the mobile station notifies the network about the capability of the mobile station. The network stores the information on the mobile station capability for future reception management of another new call attempt to the mobile station.
The mobile station informs the network of the environmental radio condition around the mobile station when the mobile station responds to the paging, whereby the network recognizes the condition.
Once the mobile station responds to the paging, the network establishes the terminal association between the network and the mobile station. The establishment of the terminal association is executed as follows:
a) The user authentication of the mobile station is executed as described above. The user authentication will be described in more detail at the section entitled “User Authentication” of this chapter.
b) In order to preserve signals transmitted through the control channel and the information channel between the mobile station and the network from being intercepted and manipulated by a third party, signals are ciphered. The encipherment will be described in more detail at the section entitled “Encipherment” of this chapter.
c) The mobile station is informed of successes and failures of the above-mentioned respective procedures.
After the establishment of the terminal association, a routing process is carried out for specifying the route to the intra-network control node which has controlled the establishment, and then the intra-network control node is informed of the setting up of the channels within the network and the services requested by the originating user terminal, so as to activated the incoming call acceptance control function. Additionally, the incoming call acceptance control function is informed of an instance of the terminal association control function, whereby they are associating with each other.
Upon the call attempt, the user profile of the called terminal is retrieved and analyzed, so that the services that can be provided for the called terminal are determined.
On the basis of the analysis of on the call attempt, appropriate network resources, for instance, voice coder-decoders, data trunks, and wired channels in the network are captured, activated and set up.
The access link for the traffic channel and the associated control channel, which are suitable for the call attempt, can be established as will be described at the section entitled “Access Link Establishment” in this chapter. Once the associated control channel is established, the SDCCH transferring previously the control signals is released. The release of the SDCCH will be described in more detail at the section entitled “SDCCH Control” in this chapter.
The called user terminal is informed of a service request from the originating user terminal. While the called terminal is informed of the service request, the originating user terminal is informed of the calling to the called user terminal and the response from the called user terminal.
Although a call has been established between terminals, another call requested from a third party may be established.
In addition, the calling or called mobile terminal, for which the call has been established, can respond to another call (additional call). However, since the mobile terminal has been already authenticated, the authentication process is not carried out for the additional call.
Furthermore, if a plurality of mobile stations respond to the incoming call acceptance paging, a new TMUI is, during the termination procedures, reassigned to one of the mobile station where the stored TMUI is changed accidentally.
2.3.2.1.3 Call Release
“Call release” is a series of procedures for releasing the link within the network and the access link between the mobile terminal and the network used for a call, and releasing the connection between the mobile terminal and the other user terminal. The call release is carried out upon a call release request from the mobile terminal or the other user terminal, or upon a detection of the deterioration of the radio communication quality. The call release includes a user disconnection procedure (updating the user status data) and a procedure for releasing access links.
When releasing the last call for a mobile station, the association between the mobile station and the network is released. This process accompanies with updating the status data in connection with the mobile station.
For executing the call release, the system comprises the following capabilities.
The network is notified of a call release request from a user terminal, and the user terminal is notified of the acceptance of the release request by the network.
In addition, the network informs the user terminal of a call release request from the other user terminal.
In order to update the user status data when the call release occurs, the user profile is updated.
The access link corresponding to the released call is also released as will be described in more detail at section 3.2.2.3 entitled “Access Link Release.”
It is determined as to if the released call is the last call for the mobile station or not. If it is the last call, the status data in connection with the mobile station managed in the network is updated to indicate none call status.
Call can be also released upon an access link release procedure (refer to section 3.2.2.3 entitled “Access Link Release”) resulting from the detection of out of synchronization.
Call can be also released upon a call release request from the mobile terminal.
Call can be also released if the originating mobile station abandons the call.
2.3.2.2 System Capabilities on Access Link Control
2.3.2.2.1 SDCCH Control
“SDCCH Control” includes a procedure for establishing an SDCCH (standalone dedicated control channel) for transporting control massages between the mobile station and the network and a wired access link for transporting the control messages within the network on the basis of an access of a mobile station; and a procedure for releasing the SDCCH and the wired access link within the network when they become not necessary. These procedures are carried out for every process, which needs the interaction between the mobile station and the network, e.g., the mobile station call origination process, the mobile station call termination process, and the mobile station location registration.
In order to execute the SDCCH control, the system comprises the following functions.
The mobile station executes a random access procedure over the RACH (random access channel) and requests the network to establish the SDCCH. In response, the network assigns radio resources (uplink and downlink codes) for the SDCCH to the mobile station using a FACH (forward access channel). The relationship between the establishment request and the assigned the code resources are determined by a random number (personal identification or PID) contained in the request message transmitted by the mobile station.
In addition, the network can select the radio resources (uplink and downlink short codes) for the SDCCH for each sector from the resources managing for the sector. Unique uplink and downlink long codes are used for each base station. In addition, the phase of long codes used for each sector in a cell is different from that used for the other sectors in the same cell. Thus, the mobile station obtains the current downlink long codes by a cell search process or broadcast information from a broadcasting channel BCCH1 and obtains the current uplink long codes by broadcast information from the broadcasting channel BCCH1.
The network also establishes a wired access link for transferring the control messages within the network upon the establishment request for the SDCCH from the mobile station.
It is possible to recognize information on the location of the mobile station when requesting to establish the wired access link within the network.
It is possible to control the power for transmission through the RACH, FACH, and SDCCH. The control manner will be described at section 2.3.2.2.6 in more detail.
The network and mobile station can recognize that the status in which the SDCCH is unnecessary since, for instance, a process, e.g., the location registration which is not associated with call is ended or transited to the ACCH. Then, the network and mobile can release the SDCCH respectively.
2.3.2.2.2 Access Link Establishment
“Access link establishment” is a series of procedures for setting up a traffic channel for transferring user information and control channels for transferring control information between the network and the mobile station that originates a call or is called. These procedures include establishing wired access link in the network and radio access link between the network and the mobile station.
In order to execute the access link establishment, the system comprises the following capabilities.
The network determines information transfer capabilities and quality levels needed for the respective connection access links on the basis of a call/connection control request, and then allocates appropriate resources to the access links.
The mobile station designates candidate sectors, for which the wired access links or radio access links should be established, on the basis of the measurements of the perch channels and the broadcast information from the network. Then, the mobile station informs the network of the candidate sectors. The call acceptance control procedure will be described in more detail at section 2.3.2.2.7.
The network sets up the wired access link between the network and the respective candidate sectors. Each established wired access link includes the traffic channel for transferring user information and, if necessary, the control channel for transferring control signals.
The network stores the uplink long codes for radio access links in a database within the network according to MS identifiers (TMUI/IMUI). The network retrieves the information from the database to set up an access link.
The network selects radio resources for the radio access link in the specified sector and allocate them to the mobile station. The radio resource selection will be described in more detail at section 2.3.2.2.5.
The mobile station transmits information to the network for determining the initial power for transmission through the downlink radio access link, the information being based on the measurements on the perch channel and including information on the power for transmitting through the perch channel and the signal-to-interference ratio about the signal received from the perch channel.
The network determines the initial power for transmission through the downlink radio access link upon the reception of the information from the mobile station. The control of the transmission power will be described in more detail at section 2.3.2.2.6.
The base station controller receives information on the wired access links and the radio access links and is able to start diversity handover based on the information at the same time when the access links are established for the candidate base stations, and carries out diversity handover on the basis of the information on the candidate sectors. Handover procedures will be described in more detail at section 2.3.2.2.4.
The mobile station informs the network of the respective phase differences upon a broadcast information (periodical broadcasts at the intervals of 20 msec), each phase difference being the difference between the uplink long code phase of the sector to which the SDCCH is established and the uplink long code phase of another candidate sector.
The network synchronizes the uplink radio access links on the basis of the uplink long code phase difference information from the mobile station.
2.3.2.2.3 Access Link Release
“Access link release” is a series of procedures for releasing all traffic channels for transferring user information between the network and the mobile station and all control channels for transferring control information therebetween.
“Access link release” procedures include a procedure for releasing wired access links in the network and radio access links between the network and the mobile station.
In order to execute the access link release procedures, the system comprises the following capabilities.
Due to release of an individual connection or release of connections for a released call, the network releases the corresponding access link. The release of access link is requested from the network to the corresponding mobile station.
If the network detects out-of-synchronization status in connection with all handover branches involved in an access link and does not detect the synchronization status again for a certain time period counted by a squelch reservation timer, the network executes to release the access link.
If the mobile station detects out-of-synchronization status in connection with all handover branches involved in an access link, the mobile station stops to transmit over radio channels involved in the access link and causes the network to recognize that the out-of-synchronization status occurs. It is possible that the mobile station informs the network of the occurrence of the out-of-synchronization.
When an access link is released during diversity handover, all the handover branches involved in the access link are also released.
2.3.2.2.4 Handover
“Handover” is a series of procedures for altering the access point through which a mobile station accesses the network while the communication therebetween is continued. The handover is necessary for the reason of travelling of the mobile station and deterioration of the communication quality, or in order to distribute traffic. The handover procedures include alteration of radio access link and if necessary, alteration of wired access link. In order to execute handover, the system comprises the following capabilities.
The system can execute various types of processes for realizing handover as described below.
a) Inter-Sector Handover Branch Addition in Single Cell
Near the boundary between sectors in a single cell, added is a branch for a new sector, which is different from the sector currently used, but in the same cell.
This addition does not accompany with an addition of the wired access link in the network.
b) Inter-Cell Handover Branch Addition
Near the boundary between cells, added is a branch for a new cell, which is different from the cell used currently. This addition does accompany with an addition of the wired access link for the newly added cell in the network.
c) Inter-Sector Handover Branch Deletion in Single Cell
Near the boundary between sectors in a single cell, deleted is one of handover branches for the sectors when intra-cell diversity is no longer necessary. This deletion does not accompany with a deletion of the wired access link in the network.
d) Intra-Cell Handover Branch Deletion
Near the boundary between cells, deleted is one of handover branches for the cells when inter-cell diversity is no longer necessary. This deletion does accompany with a deletion of the wired access link for the newly deleted cell in the network.
e) Intra-Cell Branch Replacement Handover
At a boundary between sectors in a single cell, all handover branches are released, and then a new access link is established for the sector, which should be newly served. If the service attributes are not necessary to be changed for this handover, the wired access link in the network is left.
f) Inter-Cell Branch Replacement Handover
At a boundary between cells, all handover branches are released, and then a new access link is established for the cell, which should be newly served. If the service attributions are not necessary to be changed for this handover, the wired access link in the network is left.
g) Intra-Sector Frequency Replacement Handover
For all handover branches being used for communication, the radio frequency is replaced by another frequency. This handover does not accompany with an addition or deletion of the wired access link in the network.
h) Code Replacement Handover
For a handover branch being used for communication, the downlink short code is replaced by another downlink short code belonging to the same code type in the same sector. This handover does not accompany with a replacement of the wired access link in the network.
i) User Datarate Modification
In order to alter user-to-user connection attributions, e.g., the user data rate or voice/data type, all handover branches for the connection is released, and then access links for the altered connection are established.
j) ACCH Replacement
Although radio resources used by an ACCH are released for the reason that a connection or call is released, it is sometimes necessary to continue another call. In this case, the ACCH is handed over to the wired access link and radio access link that has been used for the remaining call.
When control signals are transported through an ACCH corresponding to a connection, it is sometimes necessary to alter the transmission rate. In this case, the ACCH is handed over to the wired access link and radio access link that has been used for another connection.
k) Code Type Replacement
“Code type replacement” may be carried out. In this case, for all handover branches being used for communication, the downlink short codes are replaced by downlink short codes belonging to a different code type in the same sector. This handover does not accompany with a replacement of the wired access link in the network.
By the above-mentioned handover branch addition, the maximum number of handover branches availed for all simultaneous connections is “N.”
The mobile station, on the basis of the perch channel measurements and call acceptance information from the network, requests the network to activate the handover branch addition, handover branch deletion, and branch replacement handover. The request information for the activation includes the information for designating the candidate sectors for handover. The call acceptance control will be described in more detail at section 2.3.2.2.7.
Upon the reception of the activation request, the network selects the sectors for handover from the candidate sectors.
In the handover branch addition, the network assigns the radio frequency band, which is the same as of the currently used branch, to the channel for the additional branch, the radio frequency band being the radio resource. In addition, the network assigns the same uplink code resources to all of the branches for one connection. The selection of the radio resources will be described in more detail at section 2.3.2.2.5.
When it is impossible to carry out the handover because of a deficiency in necessary radio resources or intra-network resources, the network ignores the handover request from the mobile station. If the mobile station does not receive the handover executing instruction, from the network for a certain time, that should be transmitted upon the reception of the handover request from the same mobile station, the mobile station analyzes the necessity of handover again. Then, the mobile station requests the network to execute the handover again if it is determined to be necessary.
The mobile station sends the network the information to be used for determining the initial transmission power over the downlink access link of the additional branch. The information is based on the perch channel measurements.
Upon the reception of the information for determining the initial transmission power, the network determines initial transmission power over the downlink access link of the additional branch. The transmission power control will be described in more detail at section 2.3.2.2.6.
In the handover branch addition, based on a broadcast information (periodical report information) at the intervals of 20 msec, the mobile station informs the network of the phase difference of uplink long codes among the respective candidate sectors, and the group of frame offsets and group of slot offsets used in the mobile station.
Upon the reception of notification of the uplink long code phase difference information and the groups of frame offsets and slot offsets, the network establishes the synchronization of the uplink radio access link of the sector corresponding to the added branch.
At the same time for execution of the branch addition, intra-sector frequency replacement handover, or user data rate modification, it is possible to execute the handover branch addition at boundary between sectors in single cell or at the boundary between cells. By the handover branch addition at boundary between sectors in single cell or at the boundary between cells, the maximum number of newly added handover branches is N−1.
The handover branch addition and handover branch deletion can be executed at the same time. After the execution of the handover branch addition and handover branch deletion in the combined manner, the maximum number of the branches is “N.”
At the same time for execution of the access link establishment, the handover branch addition, branch replacement handover for another connection, ACCH replacement, or the code type replacement may be executed for another connection.
The network requests the mobile station to replace the short codes in order to utilize the short code resources efficiently.
At the same time for the releasing access links, the ACCH replacement is also carried out.
However, handover of the SDCCH is not carried out.
2.3.2.2.5 Radio Resource Selection
“Radio resource selection” is a selection of suitable radio resources, for instance, radio frequency channel, short codes, offsets, on the basis of information transmitted from the mobile station to executing the SDCCH establishment, access link establishment, and the procedures for handover. For the radio resource selection, the system comprises the following capabilities.
The mobile station informs the network of the radio capabilities, for example, the available radio frequency channels or available spreading codes of the mobile station.
The network retrieves uplink long codes from a database in the network, the uplink long codes being associated with respective mobile stations, so that each mobile station corresponds to unique uplink long codes.
The network manages the states of respective uplink short codes (if the uplink short codes are used by mobile stations or not) for each sector and selects the uplink short codes for respective connections. The network also determines to execute or refuse the requested radio resource selection on the basis of the respective uplink interference levels of the sectors, requested transmission rate, and requested quality level.
The network manages the states of respective downlink short codes (the downlink short codes are used by the respective mobile station or not) and selects the downlink short codes for respective connections in accordance with a request.
The network selects the group of radio frame offsets and group of slot offsets during the radio resource selection for the SDCCH establishment and access link establishment.
2.3.2.2.6 TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL
“Transmission power control” includes an initial transmission power determination process for determining the initial transmission power for transmitting signals through the radio access link at the start of signal transmission through the RACH (random access channel) or the FACH (forward access channel), at the SDCCH (stand alone dedicated control channel) establishment, at access link establishment, or at procedures for handover; and a downlink transmission power control for respective handover branches during diversity handover. However, the transmission power control does not include the transmission power control executed at layer 1.
(1) Initial Uplink Transmission Power Determination
Power for transmission over the uplink radio channel from the mobile station to the base station should be minimized as small as possible to reduce the capacity of the uplink radio channel and to prevent other radio access links from affected. For this purpose, it is preferable to select the radio zone in which the power can be minimized for signal conveyance when selecting the radio zone whose base station should be ready (on standby) for communication with the mobile station immediately or will commence communication with the mobile station after handover. Therefore, means for the selection is necessary.
However, traditional mobile stations simply detect respective reception levels or respective SIRS (signal-to-interference ratios) of channels for the base stations as information used for radio zone selection. Furthermore, the respective transmission power levels vary according to the base stations sometimes. Therefore, in traditional communications systems, it is impossible for each mobile station to optimize the uplink transmission power from the mobile station itself to the network.
In order to resolve these issues and determine the initial uplink transmission power optimally, the system comprises the following capabilities.
Using the periodical report (information broadcast at the intervals of 20 msec) via perch channels, the network broadcasts calibrated perch channel transmission power levels. The calibrated perch channel transmission power levels has been calibrated in view of the respective path losses at cables and so on within the respective base stations.
Using the periodical report (information broadcast at the intervals of 20 msec) via perch channels, the network also broadcasts uplink interference levels.
On the basis of the calibrated perch channel transmission power levels, the respective uplink interference levels, the respective perch channel reception power levels measured at the mobile station, and respective signal-to-interference ratios involved in reception at the respective near base stations, the mobile station can determine the initial uplink transmission power level. The signal-to-interference ratios as reference data are previously stored in the mobile station.
With reference to
In
Lpa=Pa−Ra
The path loss Lpb may be calculated similarly.
On the basis of the calculated respective path losses in relation to the base stations, the respective uplink interference levels in relation to the base stations, and respective signal-to-interference ratios involved in reception at the respective near base stations, the mobile station calculates respective necessary uplink transmission power levels between the mobile station and respective near base stations. This calculation is conducted for selecting the radio zone to which a mobile station should camp on or should be handed over. More specifically, the mobile station selects the radio zone in which the necessary uplink transmission power level is minimum among the respective necessary uplink transmission power levels, and optimizes (minimizes) the uplink transmission power in accordance with the selected radio zone (selected base station). Accordingly, although the respective transmission power levels of the perch channels vary according to the base stations, each mobile station can optimize the uplink transmission power in the invented system.
(2) Initial Downlink Transmission Power Determination
1) FACH and Downlink SDCCH
The mobile station sends information via RACH to inform the network (more exactly, BTS) of the signal-to-interference ratio in relation to the perch channel reception at the mobile station. The BTS determines the initial downlink transmission power through the FACH (forward access channel) or SDCCH (stand alone dedicated control channel) on the basis of the perch channel signal-to-interference ratio in relation to the reception at the mobile station, the perch channel transmission power level, the required signal-to-interference ratio involved in reception at the mobile station via the FACH or SDCCH, and a rate-calibration parameter. The perch channel transmission power level is stored as a reference data for the BTS.
2) Downlink TCH
Using a broadcast channel (BCCH1) mapped at the perch channel, the network (more exactly, BTS) broadcasts a perch channel transmission power levels, which is not calibrated. Using the SDCCH, the mobile station informs the network (more specifically, the base station controller function) of the perch channel reception SIR at the mobile station. Using the SDCCH, the mobile station informs the network (the base station controller function) of the perch channel transmission power level which is not calibrated.
On the basis of the perch channel signal-to-interference ratio in relation to the reception at the mobile station, the non-calibrated perch channel transmission power level, the required signal-to-interference ratio involved in reception at the mobile station via the TCH (traffic channel), and a rate-calibration parameter, the BSC function in the network calculates the initial downlink transmission power through the TCH. The required SIR involved in reception at the mobile station via the TCH is stored as a reference data for the BSC function. If there are a plurality of candidate zones from which selected is the zone to which the traffic channel is established, the BSC function calculates the respective initial downlink transmission power levels of the respective zones and selects the minimal power level. The branch for the zone corresponding to the minimal power level is the main branch.
The BSC function of the network informs the base station of the initial downlink transmission power level.
The mobile station can execute the low-rate downlink transmission power control according to layer 3 since it is possible that high-rate transmission power control is not executed ordinarily due to the deterioration of transportation via a radio branch during diversity handover.
The mobile station informs the BSC function in the network of the non-calibrated perch channel transmission power level and the perch channel reception SIR periodically.
The mobile station increases or decreases the SIR involved in the reception at mobile station, so that the reception quality at the mobile station maintains a standard quality.
On the basis of the updated values, the network calculates and/or determines the transmission power level again.
2.3.2.2.7 Call Acceptance Control
“Call acceptance control” is a series of control procedures wherein the uplink interference level, downlink transmission power, and activated equipment resources, which can be measured or detected by the base station, are compared with respective allowable limits; a leeway/restriction (idle/busy) information is produced on the basis of the comparison; and a call attempt is allowed or restricted on the basis of the leeway/restriction information at a call origination, incoming call acceptance, bearer alteration, or handover. The call acceptance control can be conducted at the network and the mobile station.
However, the call acceptance control at the mobile station is an option. If the call acceptance control is conducted at the mobile station, it is possible to reduce the number of wastable call attempts, establishment attempts of traffic channels, bearer alteration requests, and handover requests. Therefore, the load involved in control procedures in the network can be lessened.
On the other hand, the call acceptance control at the network is inevitable since the network should recognize the number of call acceptances and the congestion status of traffic.
(1) Call Acceptance Control at Mobile Station
In order that the mobile station carries out the call acceptance control, the system comprises the following capabilities.
Using broadcasting channels (BCCH2), the network broadcasts a call acceptance information.
The mobile station refers to the broadcast information, via broadcasting channels BCCH2 from candidate base stations from which selected is the base station to which the traffic channel should be established, directly before the commencement of the random access for the first call origination, transmission of the setup message for the second call origination, reception of the setup message for call termination, handover trigger transmission, and transmission of the setup message to alter the bearer.
On the basis of the call acceptance information, the mobile station determines to allow or reject the call attempt.
(2) Call Acceptance Control at Network
Upon the reception of a request for activating TCH, the network determines to allow or reject the call attempt on the basis of the call acceptance information.
2.3.2.2.8 Standby Control
“Standby control” is controlling to transit the state, so that the mobile station can transmit and receive after the power of mobile station is turned on or after the mobile station visits from outside to inside of the network. Additionally, a procedure for changing the radio zone to camp on due to the travel of the mobile station is called “standby zone transition control.”
(1) Standby Control
In order to execute the standby control, the system comprises the following capabilities.
Using the periodical report (information broadcast at the intervals of 20 msec) via perch channels, the network broadcasts the calibrated perch channel transmission power levels. The calibrated perch channel transmission power levels are calibrated in view of the respective path losses at cables and so on within the respective base stations.
Referring to the calibrated perch channel transmission power levels in relation to the zones in which the downlink long codes may be used and the perch channel reception power levels at the mobile station, the mobile station selects the zone having the minimum path loss. Then, the mobile station refers to the broadcast information via BCCH1 corresponding to the selected zone.
Using a broadcast channel (BCCH1) mapped at the perch channel, the network broadcasts a standby permission level, standby deterioration level, network number, restricted information, and so on.
Referring to the broadcast information via BCCH1, the mobile station determines to allow or reject the standby.
The network, using the broadcast information via BCCH1 at the perch channel, broadcasts the information on the data format in the control channel.
Referring to the broadcast information via BCCH1, the mobile station determines the paging channel to which the mobile station is connected.
Referring to the broadcast information via BCCH1, the mobile station determines the RACH, which the mobile station should use.
The network, using the broadcast information via BCCH1 at the perch channel, broadcasts the information on the uplink long codes for the corresponding zone.
Referring to the broadcast information via BCCH1, the mobile station determines the uplink long codes used for the RACH and SDCCH.
(2) Standby Zone Transition Control
In order to execute the standby zone transition control, the system comprises the following capabilities.
The network, using the broadcast information via BCCH1 at the perch channel, broadcasts information on the downlink long codes for the circumferential zones.
The mobile station retrieves the information on the downlink long codes for the circumferential zones from the broadcast information via BCCH1, and conducts the zone transition
2.3.2.3 System Capabilities on Mobility Management
Next, system capabilities on mobility management will be described.
2.3.2.3.1 Terminal Location Registration and Update
For permitting the travel of the mobile terminals, the terminal locations are supervised by the network. Therefore, the terminal location data is registered when a user terminal is first detected by the network (when the power of the mobile terminal is turned on or the user terminal roams to the network from another network). The terminal location data is automatically updated when the location of a mobile terminal changes in the same network.
In order to execute the terminal location registration and update, the system comprises the following capabilities.
The network informs a mobile station of the location information, so that the mobile stations recognize the location information.
When the mobile station travels in the network, the network recognizes that the mobile station moves from the location that is managed by the network and requests to update the location information managed in the mobile station.
An SDCCH (stand alone dedicated control channel) is established for transporting the control signals for the location registration between the network and the mobile station (refer to the section entitled “SDCCH Control”).
Terminal authentication is carried out to prevent the network from an access by an improper mobile terminal. Insofar as a terminal is authenticated, the location information on the terminal is updated in the network.
The network can assign a new TMUI (temporary mobile user identity) to a mobile station.
The network starts the authentication with the IMUI of a mobile station if the mobile station is not authenticated by the TMUI check.
The network notifies the mobile station of the location registration completion.
If the mobile station does not receive the location registration/update completion report, the mobile station triggers the location registration/update procedure again.
2.3.2.4 System Capabilities on Security Services
Next, system capabilities on security services will be described.
2.3.2.4.1 User Authentication
“User authentication” is to determine if each mobile user terminal sending a call attempt to the network is proper or not. The user authentication is carried out when a mobile station originates a first call, when a first call is directed to a mobile station, or when the location is registered.
In order to execute the user authentication, the system comprises the following capabilities.
When a mobile station accesses the network, the network produces various information (an authentication calculation result and random number) being necessary for the authentication of the mobile station, and requests the mobile station to execute an authentication calculation. The network produces an encipherment key used in an encipherment calculation after the authentication.
The mobile station produces an authentication calculation result based on the random number sent by the network and informs the network of the result.
The authentication calculation results made by the network and the mobile station are compared with each other.
The network sends an inquiry about the international mobile user identity (IMUI) to the mobile station if the mobile station has not been authenticated at the authentication procedure using the temporary mobile user identity (TMUI). The network then produces the authentication information and executes the authentication procedure using the IMUI.
If the mobile station is not authenticated even at the authentication procedure using the information based on the IMUI, the origination procedure, the termination procedure, or location registration procedure is stopped.
2.3.2.4.2 Encipherment
“Encipherment” is a series of procedures to cipher control signals or user signals transported through the SDCCH, ACCH, or TCH for preventing the signals from being intercepted or edited by a third party. The encipherment is carried out at the origination procedure, the termination procedure, or location registration procedure.
In order to execute the encipherment, various information, e.g., encipherment keys and relevant information for producing the encipherment keys, for ciphering or deciphering control signals or user signals that should be transported via wireless interfaces are managed. The information is delivered within the network and to the destination mobile station when the encipherment is conducted.
The delivered information is used for ciphering the signals and the ciphered signals are transported via radio interfaces.
The onset time of ciphering and onset time of deciphering are mutually notified between the network and the mobile station.
2.3.2.4.3 TMUI Management
TMUI is a temporary terminal identifier or user identifier transported via the air interface in order to keep the IMUI a secret and to decrease the total length of the terminal identifier. The network assigns the TMUIs to the mobile stations communicable with the network and informs the respective mobile stations of the individual TMUIs. After the TMUI assignment, the network manages each TMUI all the while the corresponding mobile station exists in the coverage area of the network.
The TMUI assignment may be executed at the location registration procedure, origination procedure, and termination procedure. However, in the invented system, the assignments of TMUIs at origination procedure and termination procedure are option.
In order to execute the TMUI management, the system comprises the following capabilities.
When the network accesses a mobile station for the location registration, location update, origination (option), or termination (option), the network prepares a TMUI for the mobile station and stores it.
The network informs the mobile station of the TMUI and confirms that the mobile station stores the TMUI. When the location is registered, the mobile station is informed of information indicating the TMUI and the node where the TMUI is assigned. However, at the origination or termination, the mobile station is informed of only the TMUI.
The TMUI is sent from the network to the mobile station via the air interface after ciphering for preventing the TMUI being intercepted improperly at the air interface.
In order to prevent double assignment of the TMUTs, the association of TMUIs and the mobile stations are managed.
2.3.2.5 System Capabilities on System Management
Next, system capabilities on system management will be described.
2.3.2.5.1 Requirement for System Synchronization
“Requirement for system synchronization” is a requirement for synchronization in the system including the network and a mobile station in order to perform diversity handover with a minimum buffering delay. In this system, the MSC (MCC) and the serving BTSs operate according to the standard clock signal at the regular intervals of 640 msec, so that the time alignment is established among the MSC (MCC) and the serving BTSs. However, the phase difference among the MSC function and the serving BTSs is allowable insofar as it is equal to or less than 5 msec. In other words, the requirement for system synchronization is the phase difference within 5 msec.
2.4 Control Manners
Next, control manners will be described.
2.4.1 Functional Network Architecture
In
BCAF (bearer control agent function) in the mobile terminal controls radio bearers for the mobile terminal. BCF (bearer control function) controls bearers. BCFr (bearer control function (radio bearer associated)) in the network controls radio bearers.
TACF (terminal access control function) in the network controls access for the mobile terminal, e.g., terminal paging execution. CCF (call control function) controls call and connection. SCF (service control function) controls services. SDF (service data function) stores various data for execution of services.
LRCF (location registration control function) controls the mobility management. LRDF (location registration data function) stores various data for mobility management. SSF (service switching function) is an interface between the CCF and SCF and detects the trigger for a service control. SRF (specialized resource function) controls access to a special device, e.g., information storing device.
MCF (mobile control function) in the mobile terminal is an interface to the network for a non-call service. SACF (service access control function) in the network is an interface to the mobile station for a non-call service. MRRC in the mobile station controls radio resources. RRC in the network controls radio resources.
MRTR (mobile radio transmission and reception) in the mobile station controls the encipherment or transmission and so on. RFTR (radio frequency transmission and reception) in the network controls the encipherment or transmission and so on. UIMF (user identification management function) stores the information on the mobile users and provides the user authentication and encipherment. In the following description, the UIMF may be sometimes called UTMF.
In addition, relationships between functional entities are shown in
The designations of the relationships are also stated in the following.
The relationship between FE01 and FE06 (CCAF′-CCF′) is called Relationship ra.
The relationship between FE02 and FE05 (TACAF-TACF) is called Relationship rb.
The relationship between FE07 and FE09 (LRCF-SSF) is called Relationship rc.
The relationship between FE07 and FE08 (LRCF-LRDF) is called Relationship rd.
The relationship between FE09 and FE10 (SSF-SRF) is called Relationship re.
The relationship between FE07 and FE10 (LRCF-SRF) is called Relationship rf.
The relationship between FE05 and FE07 (TACF-LRCF) is called Relationship rg.
The relationship between FE05 and FE12 (TACF-SACF) is called Relationship rh.
The relationship between FE05 and FE06 (TACF-CCF) is called Relationship ri.
The relationship between FE05 and FE04 (TACF-BCF) is called Relationship rj.
The relationship between FE05 and FE04a is called relationship rja.
The relationship between FE05 and FE04b is called relationship rjb.
The relationship between FE07 and FE12 (LRCF-SACF) is called relationship rk.
The relationship between FE11 and FE12 (MCF-SACF) is called relationship rl.
The relationship between FE01 and FE02 (CCAF-TACAF) is called relationship rm.
The relationship between FE02 and FE03 (TACAF-BCAF) is called relationship rn.
The relationship between FE13 and FE14 (MRRC-MRTR) is called relationship ro.
The relationship between FE13 and FE15 (MRRC-RRC) is called relationship rp.
The relationship between FE15 and FE16 (RRC-RFTR) is called relationship rq.
The relationship between FE03 and FE04 (BCAF-BCF) is called relationship rr.
The relationship between FE04 and FE06 (BCF-CCF) is called relationship rs.
The relationship between FE05 and FE15 (TACF-RRC) is called relationship rt.
The relationship between FE02 and FE13 (TACAF-MRRC) is called relationship ru.
The relationship between FE02 and FE17 (TACAF-TIMF) is called relationship rv.
The relationship between FE11 and FE17 (MCF-TIMF) is called relationship rw.
The relationship between FE01 and FE18 (CCAF-UIMF) is called relationship rx.
The relationship between FE11 and FE18 (MCF-UIMF) is called relationship ry.
The relationship between FE04a and FE04b (BCFr-BCF) is called relationship r44.
The relationship between FE06 and FE06 (CCF-CCF) is called relationship r66.
The relationship between FE07 and FE07 (LRCF-LRCF) is called relationship r77.
The relationship between FE05 and FE05 (TACF-TACF) is called relationship r55.
The relationship between FE08 and FE08 (LRDF-LRDF) is called relationship r88.
The above-described relationships between the functional entities are also represented in
2.4.2 Information Flows of Usual Communication Services
2.4.2.1 Origination for Initial Call and Additional Call
a) Function & Model
a-1) Initial Outgoing Call
a-2) Additional Outgoing Call
b) Information Flows
b-1) Initial Outgoing Call
b-2) Additional Outgoing Call
c) Definitions of Information Flows, Information Elements, and Functional Entity Actions
The information flow diagrams will be described supplementally in the following and information elements in the flow diagrams will be discussed and represented in tables.
A TA SETUP request indication is used by CCAF in the case of a mobile terminal call origination to request to set up a mobile terminal access to the network and the connection between the CCAF and TACAF.
Another TA SETUP request indication is sent from TACAF to request the establishment of the terminal access, i.e., signaling connection between TACAF and TACF.
A TA SETUP PERMISSION request indication is issued by the TACF to inform to request the authorization of the mobile terminal access to the network.
A REVERSE LONG CODE RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve a reverse (uplink) long code.
Another REVERSE LONG CODE RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve the reverse long code.
A REVERSE LONG CODE RETRIEVAL response confirmation is also used to retrieve the reverse long code.
A TERMINAL STATUS UPDATE request indication is used to update the terminal status.
A TERMINAL STATUS UPDATE response confirmation is a response to the request indication.
An ADD-ROUTING INFORMATION request indication is sent to the LRDF to add a routing address to the subscriber's profile. This information flow is sent only when the authentic mobile terminal has been found and the above related information has been obtained.
An ADD-ROUTING INFORMATION response confirmation is a response to the request indication.
A TA SETUP PERMISSION response confirmation is issued by the LRCF to inform the TACF that the mobile terminal access to the network is authorized.
A REVERSE LONG CODE RETRIEVAL response confirmation is used to retrieve the reverse long code.
A TA SETUP response confirmation is used to notify that the mobile terminal access has been established.
Another TA SETUP response confirmation is used to confirm that the setup of the terminal access and the connection between the CCAF and TACAF have been completed.
A SETUP request indication is used to request the establishment of the connection.
A TACF INSTANCE ID INDICATIONquest indication is used to retrieve the reverse long code.
A CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT request indication is used by MRRC to trigger measurement of cell selection information. This is a requesting information flow whose confirmation (CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT response confirmation) provides the result of the measurement.
A CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT response confirmation provides the result of the cell selection information measurement requested by the CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT request indication.
A CELL CONDITION REPORT request indication is used by the mobile terminal to report the cell selection information. The information is used by the network to select radio channels. This information flow does not require any confirmation.
A CALL SETUP PERMISSION request indication is issued by the SSF to request the authorization of the calling user.
A USER PROFILE RETRIEVAL request indication is used to request the user profile to be retrieved.
A USER PROFILE RETRIEVAL response confirmation is a response to the request indication.
A CALL SETUP PERMISSION response confirmation is issued by the LRCF to inform the calling user is authorized.
A SETUP request indication is used to request the establishment of a connection.
A PROCEEDING request indication optionally reports that the indicated connection set-up is valid and authorized and that further routing and progressing of the call is proceeding. This information flow does not require any confirmation.
A MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication is transmitted at relationship rt between the TACF and the RRC and is used by the network to indicate conditions, which the mobile terminal measures, and to report the cell selection information. When the mobile terminal is on an idle mode, the network indicates the MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication periodically. When the mobile terminal is in communication, the network indicates the MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication at the change of conditions. This information flow does not require any confirmation.
Another MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication is transmitted at relationship rp between the MRRC and the RRC and is used by the network to indicate conditions, which the mobile terminal measures, and to report cell selecting information. When the mobile terminal is on an idle mode, the network indicates the MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication periodically. When the mobile terminal is in communication, the network indicates the MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication at the change of conditions. This information flow does not require any confirmation.
A REPORT request indication, at relationship r66 between a CCF′ and another CCF′, is an information flow that is used to report status and/or other types of information transported within the network. The type of information (e.g. alerting, suspended, hold, and resume) may be indicated. This information flow does not require any confirmation.
Another REPORT request indication, at relationship ra between the CCAF and the CCF′, is an information flow that is used to report the status information and/or other types of information transported within the network. The type of information (e.g. alerting, suspended, hold, and resume) may be indicated. This information flow does not require any confirmation.
A SETUP response confirmation at relationship r66 is used to confirm that the connection has been established.
Another SETUP response confirmation at relationship ra is used to confirm that the connection has been established.
2.4.2.2 Termination for Initial Call and Additional Call
a) Functional Model
a-1) Initial Incoming Call
a-2) Additional Incoming Call
b) Information Flows
b-1) Initial Incoming Call
b-2) Additional Incoming Call
c) Definitions of Information Flows, Information Elements, and Functional Entity Actions
The information flow diagrams will be described supplementally in the following and information elements in the flow diagrams will be discussed and represented in tables.
A SETUP request indication is used to report the establishment of a connection. The detail is represented in
A ROUTING INFORMATION QUERY request indication is used to inquire the routing information. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL ID RETRIEVAL request indication is used to request the user profile to be retrieved. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL ID RETRIEVAL response confirmation is a response to the TERMINAL ID RETRIEVAL request indication. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL STATUS QUERY request indication is used to inquire the terminal status (e.g. if terminal access is active or not). The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL STATUS QUERY response confirmation is a response to the TERMINAL STATUS QUERY request indication. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL STATUS UPDATE request indication is used to update the terminal status. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL STATUS UPDATE response confirmation is a response to the TERMINAL STATUS UPDATE request indication. The detail is represented in
A PAGING AREA QUERY request indication is used to inquire the paging area where TACF resides when it is observed that the terminal access is not active.
The detail is represented in
A PAGING AREA QUERY response confirmation is a response to the PAGING AREA QUERY request indication. The detail is shown in
A PAGE request indication at relationship rg is used to trigger a TACF of paging. The detail of the PAGE request indication is represented in
A PAGING request indication at relationship rb is used to page a mobile terminal for determining its position in the network and for the routing for a call. This information flow requires a confirmation. The detail of the PAGING request indication is represented in
A PAGING response confirmation is used to respond to the request indication. The detail is represented in
A PAGE response confirmation is a response to the request indication and notifies the LRCF of the paging result. LRCF initiates SLP for the user authentication of the responding user after receiving this information flow. The detail is represented in
A REVERSE LONG CODE RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve a reverse (uplink) long code. The detail of the reverse long code at relationship rg is represented in
Another REVERSE LONG CODE RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve the reverse long code. The detail of the reverse long code at relationship rd is represented in
A REVERSE LONG CODE RETRIEVAL response confirmation is used to retrieve the reverse long code. The detail is represented in
A CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT request indication is used by the MRRC to trigger the measurement of cell selecting information. This information flow requires a confirmation. The confirmation (CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT response confirmation) provides the result of the measurement. The detail of the CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT request indication is represented in
A CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT response confirmation provides the result of the cell selection information measurement requested by the CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT request indication. The detail of the CELL CONDITION MEASUREMENT response confirmation is represented in
A CELL CONDITION REPORT request indication is used by the mobile terminal to report the cell selection information. The information is used by the network to select radio channels. This information flow does not require any confirmation. The detail is represented in
An ADD-ROUTING INFORMATION request indication is sent to the LRDFp to add the routing information to the subscriber's profile. This information flow is only sent when the authentic mobile terminal has been found and the above related information has been obtained. The detail is represented in
An ADD-ROUTING INFORMATION response confirmation is a response to the ADD-ROUTING INFORMATION request indication. The detail of the ADD-ROUTING INFORMATION response confirmation is represented in
A PAGE AUTHORIZED request indication at relationship rg is used to notify the TACF of the result of the terminal authentication. The detail is represented in
A REVERSE LONG CODE RETRIEVAL response confirmation is used to retrieve the reverse long code. The detail is represented in
A PAGE AUTHORIZED request indication is used to notify the TACF of the result of the terminal authentication.
A ROUTING INFORMATION QUERY response confirmation is a response to the request indication. The detail is represented in
A SETUP request indication is used to request the establishment of a connection. The detail is represented in
A TERMINATION ATTEMPT request indication is used to request the user's profile which may be needed to proceed the call process. The detail is represented in
A USER PROFILE RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve the called user's profile from the LRDF. The detail is represented in
A USER PROFILE RETRIEVAL response confirmation is a response to the request indication from the LRCF. The detail is represented in
A TERMINATION ATTEMPT response confirmation is a response to the request indication from the SSF. The detail is represented in
A SETUP request indication is used to request the establishment of a connection. The detail is represented in
A PROCEEDING request indication optionally reports that the instructed connection setup is valid and authenticated and that further routing and progressing of the call is proceeding. This information flow does not require any confirmation. The detail is represented in
A MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication is used by the network to indicate conditions, which the mobile terminal measures, and to report the cell selection information. When the mobile terminal is on an idle mode, the network indicates the MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication periodically. When the mobile terminal is in communication, the network indicates the MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication at the change of conditions. This information flow does not require any confirmation. The detail of the MEASUREMENT CONDITION NOTIFICATION request indication is represented in
A REPORT request indication is an information element that is used to report status and/or other types of information transported in the network. The type of information may be indicated (e.g. alerting, suspended, hold, resume). This information flow does not require any confirmation. The detail of the REPORT request indication is represented in
A SETUP response confirmation is used to confirm that the connection has been established. The detail is represented in
A CONNECTED request indication is used to acknowledge that a previously sent SETUP response confirmation has been received and accepted. This information flow does not require any confirmation. The detail is represented in
2.4.2.3 Call Release
2.4.2.3.1 Disconnection Instructed by User
(a) Functional Model
(b) Information Flows
(c) Definitions of Information Flows
A RELEASE request indication is used to release resources associated with a call connection, such as call ID or channels. This information flow requires a confirmation. The detail is represented in
A RELEASE response confirmation is used to indicate that all resources pervasively associated with the connection have been released. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to inform the SCF that an attempt of call release has been detected. This information flow is issued when the last call is released and the control relationship between the terminal and the network should be released. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication is used to idle the terminal call status. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE response confirmation is a response to the TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication. The detail of the TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE response confirmation is represented in
A TA RELEASE response confirmation is used for the confirmation to the TA RELEASE request indication. The detail of the TA RELEASE response confirmation is represented in
2.4.2.3.2 Disconnection Instructed by Network
(a) Functional Model
(b) Information Flows
(c) Definitions of Information Flows
The information flow diagram will be described supplementally in the following and information elements in the flow diagram will be discussed and represented in tables.
A RELEASE request indication is used to release resources associated with a call connection such as the call reference or channels. This information flow requires a confirmation. The detail is represented in
A RELEASE response confirmation is used to indicate that all resources previously associated with the connection have been released. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to inform the LRCF that an attempt of call release has been detected. This information flow is issued when the last call is released and the control relationship between the terminal and the network should be released. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication is used to idle the terminal call status. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE response confirmation is a response to the TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE response confirmation is used for the response confirmation of the TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication. The detail is represented in
2.4.2.3.3 Abnormal Release
2.4.2.3.3.1 Abnormal Release Caused from Radio Link Failure Detected by Mobile Terminal
2.4.2.3.3.1.1 Common Procedure Module Used
A common procedure module used in this release process is the “user disconnect.”
2.4.2.3.3.1.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
c) Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A RADIO LINK FAILURE request indication is used to notify a radio link failure detected by the BCAF or BCFr. In this flow procedure, this information flow is issued by the BCAF. The detail is represented in
A RELEASE NOTIFICATION request indication is used to indicate that the connection between the network and the terminal has been released. The information flow does not require any confirmation. The detail is represented in
A RADIO LINK FAILURE request indication is used to notify that the link failure has been detected. The detail is represented in
Another RADIO LINK FAILURE request indication is used to notify that the link failure has been detected. The detail is represented in
A RADIO LINK FAILURE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the RADIO LINK FAILURE request indication. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is used to request to release radio bearers. This is originated by network. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to request the release of terminal access. This information flow is issued for only the last call release.
A BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to the BCF to release the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the bearer release request indication. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent by the anchor TACF to request the serving TACF to release the bearer involved in the call that should be released. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to BCF to release the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to release the bearer-and-radio-bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is used for a confirmation of the release of the bearer-and-radio-bearer requested by the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a confirmation response to inform the TACF that the previous request to release the radio bearer has been completed. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to inform the LRCF that the attempt of releasing call has detected. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication is used to request to update the user profile. For call release, this information flow is used to update the user's call status to idle. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE response confirmation is a response to the TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE response confirmation is used for a response confirmation of the TA RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
2.4.2.3.3.2 Abnormal Release Caused from Radio Link Failure Detected by Network
2.4.2.3.3.2.1 Common Procedure Module Used
A common procedure module used in this release process is the “user disconnect.”
2.4.2.3.3.2.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
c) Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A RADIO LINK FAILURE request indication is used to notify that a link failure has been detected and reported by either BCFr or BCFa. The detail is represented in
Another RADIO LINK FAILURE request indication is used to notify that the link failure has been detected. The detail is represented in
A RADIO LINK FAILURE response confirmation is a confirmation response to the RADIO LINK FAILURE request indication. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is used to request to release the radio bearer. This is originated by the network. The detail is represented in
A RELEASE NOTIFICATION request indication is used to indicate that the connection between the network and the terminal has been released. The information flow does not require any confirmation. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to request the release of terminal access. This information flow is issued for only the last call.
A TA RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the TA RELEASE request indication.
A BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to BCF to release the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent by the anchor TACF to request the serving TACF to release the radio bearer involved in the call that should be released. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to BCF to release the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to release the bearer-and-radio-bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is used for a confirmation of the release of the bearer and radio bearer requested by the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a confirmation response for informing the TACF that the previous request to release the radio bearer has been completed. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued to request to release the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
Another RADIO BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is used to confirm the release of radio bearer requested by the RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to inform the LRCF that the attempt of call release has been detected. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication is used to request to update the user profile. For call release, this information flow is used to update the user's call status to idle. The detail is represented in
A TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE response confirmation is a response to the TERMINAL-STATUS-MAKE-IDLE request indication. The detail is represented in
Another TA RELEASE response confirmation is used for confirmation to the TA RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
2.4.2.3.4 User Disconnect
2.4.2.3.4.1 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
c) Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A CALL DISCONNECT request indication is used to notify the LRCF that a “user disconnect” has been detected. The detail is represented in
A USER-PROFILE-UPDATE request indication is used to request to update the user profile. For call release, this information flow is used to indicate the call has been released. The detail is represented in
A USER-PROFILE-UPDATE response confirmation is a response to the USER-PROFILE-UPDATE response confirmation. The detail is represented in
A CALL DISCONNECT response confirmation is a response to the request made by the CALL DISCONNECT request indication. The detail is represented in
2.4.3 Information Flow Diagrams for Access Link Control
2.4.3.1 SDCCH Setup
First, the SDCCH setup process will be described.
2.4.3.1.1 Common Procedure Modules Used
2.4.3.1.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
c) Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A SIGNALING CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST request indication is used by the MCF and TACF to request the network to setup the signaling channels. The detail is represented in
A SIGNALING CHANNEL SETUP request indication is used by the SCMAF to request to the network to allocate the signaling channels. The detail is represented in
A SIGNALING CHANNEL SETUP response confirmation is used by the SCMF to allocate the radio resources to the signaling channels. The detail is represented in
A SIGNALING CHANNEL SETUP REQUESTED request indication is used to indicate the reception of the signaling channel setup request (initial access detection) from the mobile terminal and to request the network to setup the corresponding signaling channels in the network. The detail is represented in
A SIGNALING CONNECTION SETUP request indication is used by the TACF and SACF to setup the signaling connection among them and the SCMF. The detail is represented in
A SIGNALING CONNECTION SETUP response confirmation is used to report the establishment of the signaling channels including the physical radio channel and the intra-network channel. The detail is represented in
A SIGNALING CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST response confirmation is used by the SCMAF to report the setup of the signaling channels to the network. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.2 Bearer Setup
Next, bearer setup procedures for the radio resource selection will be described,
2.4.3.2.1 Common Procedure Modules Used
2.4.3.2.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
Radio resources are selected under a base station which is different from the one that received a call setup request from a mobile terminal while the BSs are controlled by different TACFs. The CCF only has the relationship with the TACFa and does not have the relationship with the TACFv. The TACFa controls both bearer selection and bearer setup. There are three BCFs: BCF1, BCF2, and BCFr.
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.2.2.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A BEARER SETUP request indication is used to request the establishment of the access bearer from the CCF to TACF. The detail is represented in
A CHANNEL SELECTION request indication is used by the TACF to request to select and reserve radio resources which can support the required bearer capability. This interaction occurs when new radio resources are necessary for call setup and handover.
A CHANNEL SELECTION response confirmation is used to report the reserved radio resources to the TACF, which requested the reservation. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACF to BCF to request the establishment of the access bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent to confirm the establishment of the access bearer and to indicate the bearer ID of the bearer between the BCF and BCF. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER SETUP request indication is used to request the establishment of the access bearer from the TACFa to TACFv. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACF to BCF to request the establishment of the access bearer. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to request the establishment of the access bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFr to request the establishment of the radio bearer and the bearer between the BCF and BCFr. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication is used by the BCFr to report that the instructed radio bearer setup is valid and the establishment of the radio bearer is proceeding. This information flow does not require any confirmation. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication is issued by the TACF, which controls a new access bearer, to the TACF, which has the signaling connection, to request to newly assign a radio bearer to the mobile terminal. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACF to TACAF to request the establishment of the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
Another RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACAF to BCAF to request the establishment of the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent from the BCAF to TACAF to confirm that the establishment of radio bearer has been completed. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent to confirm that the establishment of radio bearer and bearer between the BCF and BCFr have been completed. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP response confirmation is used to confirm that the establishment of access bearer has been completed. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER SETUP response confirmation is used to confirm that the establishment of access bearer has been completed. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.3 Radio Bearer Release
2.4.3.3.1 Radio Bearer Release FOR TACF Anchor Approach
2.4.3.3.1.1 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.3.1.2 Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent by the anchor CCF to notify the anchor TACF that the attempt or event of call release has been detected and that the bearer involved in the call is being released. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is used by the TACFa to request to release the radio bearer. This is originated by the network. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A TA RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACFa to request the release of the terminal access. This information flow is issued only for the last call release.
A TA RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the TA RELEASE request indication.
A BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to BCF to release the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent by the TACFa to request the TACFv to release the bearer involved in the call is being released. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to BCF to release the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation of the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACF to release the bearer and radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is used for a confirmation of the release of the bearer and radio bearer requested by the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a confirmation of the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response confirmation to inform the CCF that the previous request to release the radio bearer has been completed. The detail is represented in
Another RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is issued by the TACAF to request the radio bearer release. The detail is represented in
Another RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is used by the BCAF to confirm the radio bearer release requested by the RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.4 SDCCH Release
Next, SDCCH release procedures will be described.
2.4.3.4.1 Common Procedure Modules Used
2.4.3.4.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.4.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A SIGNALING CHANNEL RELEASE REQUEST request indication is used by the MCF and TACF to request the release of a signaling channel. The detail is represented in
A SIGNALING CONNECTION RELEASE request indication is used by the TACF and SACF to request the release of the signaling channel (in both of the network and the radio resources). The detail is represented in
A SIGNALING CONNECTION RELEASE response confirmation is used to report the release of the signaling channel. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.5 Handover
2.4.3.5.0 Handover Process and Relevant Procedure Modules
Process 1: Handover trigger
Process 2: Handover resource reservation
Process 3: Handover execution
Process 4: Handover completion
2.4.3.5.1 Inter-Sector Handover Branch Addition in Single Cell (Handover Controlled by Same BCFR)
2.4.3.5.1.1 Common Procedure Modules
2.4.3.5.1.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.5.1.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to request the setup of an access bearer. The detail is represented in
An INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFr to request to setup new physical radio channel(s). The detail is represented in
An INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION response confirmation is a response to the INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication and is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate the completion of setup of the physical radio channel(s). The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication is sent from the visited TACF, which controls the newly assigned radio bearer, to TACFa to request to setup the radio bearer between the mobile terminal and BCFr controlled by the visited TACF. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication is sent from the TACF to TACAF to notify of the intra-BCFr handover branch addition, and requests to add a new physical radio channel to an existing physical radio channel. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION response confirmation is sent from the TACAF to TACF to notify of the reception of the HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication.
A RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACAF to BCAF to request to setup a radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation is a response to the RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication sent from the BCAF to TACAF to indicate the completion of the radio bearer setup. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.5.2 Inter-Cell Handover Branch Addition
2.4.3.5.2.1 Common Procedure Modules
2.4.3.5.2.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.5.2.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
A HANDOVER CONNECTION SETUP request indication is sent from the TACFa to BCFa to notify of a handover initiation and to request to setup an access bearer. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER CONNECTION SETUP response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to confirm the HANDOVER CONNECTION SETUP request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to setup an access bearer. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACF to BCF to request the bearer setup. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to confirm the BEARER SETUP request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFr to request to setup a bearer between the BCF and BCFr and a radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation is a response to the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication and is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate the completion of setting up of the radio bearer and bearer between the BCFr and BCF. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication is sent from the visited TACF, which controls the newly assigned radio bearer, to the TACFa to request to setup the radio bearer between the mobile terminal and BCFr. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication is sent from the TACF to TACAF to notify of the HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication and to request to setup a new physical radio channel(s) without releasing the existing physical radio channel(s). The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION response confirmation is sent from the TACAF to TACF to notify of the reception of the HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION INITIATION request indication.
A RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACAF to BCAF to request to setup a radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation is a response to the RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication and is sent from the BCAF to TACAF to indicate the completion of the radio bearer setup. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to confirm the establishment of the access bearer. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.5.3 Inter-Sector Handover Branch Deletion in Single Cell (Handover Controlled by Same BCFR)
2.4.3.5.3.1 Common Procedure Modules
2.4.3.5.3.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.5.3.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
A HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION request indication is sent from the TACF to TACAF to request to release the physical radio channel(s). The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION response confirmation is sent from the TACAF to TACF to confirm the HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to release the access bearer. The detail is represented in
An INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFr to request the release of the physical radio channel(s). The detail is represented in
An INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION response confirmation is a response to the INTRA-BCFr-HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION request indication and is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate the release of the physical radio channel(s). The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is sent from the TACFv to TACFa to confirm the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.5.4 Inter-Cell Handover Branch Deletion at Locations Other than Boundary Between Cells
2.4.3.5.4.1 Common Procedure Modules
2.4.3.5.4.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.5.4.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION request indication is sent from the TACF to TACAF to request to release the physical radio channel(s). The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION response confirmation is sent from the TACAF to TACF to confirm the HANDOVER BRANCH DELETION request indication. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACAF to BCAF to request the radio bearer release. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response to the RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication and is sent from the BCFr to TACAF to indicate the completion of the radio bearer release. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACF to BCF to release the indicated bearer in the diversity handover state. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to confirm the HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to release the access bearer. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACF to BCF to request the bearer release. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to confirm the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFr to request the bearer between the BCF and BCFr and the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response to the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication and is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate the completion of the release of the bearer and the radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is sent from the TACFv to TACFa to confirm the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.5.5 Intra-Cell Branch Replacement Handover
2.4.3.5.5.1 Common Procedure Modules Used
2.4.3.5.5.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.5.5.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Information Elements
Information flows in
A BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to setup an access bearer. The detail is represented in
An INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH REPLACEMENT request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFr to request to set up new physical radio channel(s).
An INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH REPLACEMENT response confirmation is a response to the INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH REPLACEMENT request indication and is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate the completion of the setup of the physical radio channel(s). The detail is represented in
An INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH REPLACEMENT PROCEEDING request indication is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate that the request of the handover branch replacement is accepted. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication is sent from the visited TACF, which controls the newly assigned radio bearer, to the anchor TACFa to request to setup the radio bearer between the mobile terminal and BCFr controlled by the visited TACF. The detail is represented in
A NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication is sent from the TACF to TACAF to notify of a non-soft handover execution request initiation and to request to replace an existing radio channel by the designated physical radio channel. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACAF to BCAF to request to setup a radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation is a response to the RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication and is sent from the BCAF to TACAF to indicate the completion of the radio bearer setup. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACAF to BCAF to request the radio bearer release. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response to the RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication and is sent from the BCAF to TACAF to indicate the completion of the radio bearer release. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to confirm the establishment of the access bearer. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.5.6 Inter-Cell Branch Replacement Handover
2.4.3.5.6.1 Common Procedure Modules Used
2.4.3.5.6.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.5.6.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Associated Information Elements
Information flows in
A HANDOVER CONNECTION SETUP request indication is sent from the TACFa to BCFa to notify of a handover initiation and to request to set up a new handover link. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER CONNECTION SETUP response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to confirm the HANDOVER CONNECTION SETUP request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to set up a new handover link. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACF to BCF to request a new handover link in the network. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to confirm a BEARER SETUP request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFr to request to set up a bearer between the BCF and BCFr and a radio bearer. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate that the request of the access radio link setup is accepted and that the BCFr starts setting up the access radio link. The detail is represented in FIG. 486.i
A RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication is sent from the visited TACF, which controls the newly assigned access radio link, to TACFa to request to set up the access radio link between the mobile terminal and the BCFr controlled by the visited TACF. The detail is represented in
A NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication is sent from the TACF to TACAF to notify of a NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication and to request to replace an existing physical radio channel by a designated physical radio channel. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACAF to BCAF to request to set up an access radio link. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation is a response to the RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication and is sent from the BCAF to TACAF to indicate the completion of the setup of the access radio link. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACAF to BCAF to request to release the access radio link. The detail is represented in
A RADIO BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response to the RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication and is sent from the BCAF to TACAF to request to release the access radio link. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation is a response to the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication and is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate the completion of the setup of the access radio link and the link between the BCFr and BCF. The detail is represented in
A BEARER SETUP response confirmation is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to confirm the establishment of the handover link. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFa to request to remove the indicated handover link. The detail is represented in
A HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to confirm the HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACFv to request to release the handover link in the network. The detail is represented in
Another BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACF to BCF to request to release the handover link in the network. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is sent from the BCF to TACF to confirm the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication is sent from the TACF to BCFr to request to release the access link or handover link between the BCF and BCFr and between BCAF and BCF. The detail is represented in
A BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response to the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication and is sent from the BCFr to TACF to indicate the completion of the release of the access link or hand over link. The detail is represented in
A BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is sent from the TACFv to TACFa to confirm the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The detail is represented in
2.4.3.5.7 ACCH Replacement
In relation to
As already described at section 2.2.2, one ACCH (for example, ACCH1 in
In such a communications system, however, when a set of wireless communication resources involved in the single ACCH is released due to the release of one of the traffic channels by the ending of the call, it is difficult to secure the ACCH to continue the other call. The same problem may occur when the transmission rate in the ACCH is altered. Consequently, when the radio resources involved in the employed ACCH are released due to a connection or call release, and when another call should be continued, ACCH replacement is necessary. ACCH replacement is also necessary when altering the transmission rate in the ACCH.
Accordingly, in addition to sharing the single ACCH by the multiple traffic channels for realizing the multiple calls simultaneously by the single mobile station 7, when the single set of wireless communication resources involved in the single ACCH is released, the ACCH is replaced by another ACCH.
2.4.3.5.7.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
The mobile communications control center 2a or 2b in
The base station controller 3a or 3b is provided with a TACFa (terminal access control function) and a BCFa (bearer control function). The TACFa is a functional entity for controlling the access from the network to the mobile station 7 and for instructing the activation and release of the ACCH. The BCFa (bearer control function) is a functional entity for controlling the bearer. As similar to above, the index “a” is the abbreviation of “anchor.”
The base station controller 3a or 3b, which may be the same as or other than that with the TACFa and BCFa, is provided with a TACFv and BCFv. The index “v” is the abbreviation of “visited.”
Either of the base stations 4a and 4b that are controlled by the base station controller with the TACFv and BCFv is provided with a BCFr (bearer control function) associated with radio bearers. The BCFr controls radio bearers and activates and releases the ACCH.
The mobile terminal 6 is provided with a TACAF (terminal access control agent function) and BCAF (bearer control agent function). The TACAF is a functional entity for controlling the access to the mobile terminal and for instructing the release and establishment of the ACCH. The BCAF is a functional entity for controlling the radio bearer of the mobile terminal and for executing the release and establishment of the ACCH.
The index “1” or “2” is attached to the functional entities. The index “1” means that the corresponding entity is served for the first call while the index “2” means that the corresponding entity is served for the second call within a plurality of calls that the mobile terminal 7 is carrying out.
(b) Information Flows
2.4.3.5.7.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Associated Information Elements
Information flows and information elements in
The ACCH replacement procedure in
(a) Previously, a mobile station has treated first and second calls using traffic channels TCH1 and TCH2.
(b) Then, the first call by the traffic channel TCH1 is now being finished.
(c) An associated control channel ACCH1 and the traffic channel TCH1 have used the same radio resources. The associated control channel ACCH1 has been commonly shared by the first and second calls for transporting control signals.
(d) The traffic channel TCH1 and the associated control channel ACCH1 will be released due to the finish of the first call. However, it is necessary to maintain the second call through the traffic channel TCH2, so that another associated control channel is necessary. Therefore, it is necessary to replace the associated control channel ACCH1 by another associated control channel ACCH2 that uses the same resources as of the traffic channel TCH2.
Consequently, the procedure illustrated in
When conditions (a) to (d) are satisfied, a trigger for replacing ACCH is generated as represented in
As shown in
Then, a BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACFv2, which corresponds to the second call, to setup an access bearer for the ACCH. The BEARER SETUP request indication contains a TACF-BCF relationship ID element, inter-BCF bearer ID element, base station ID element, and user information rate element as represented in
The TACFv2 sets up a to-BTS short cell connection for the ACCH and then selects a link reference which is the same as of that the traffic channel TCH2 for realizing the second call. Then, the TACFv2 sends another BEARER SETUP request indication to the BCFv2. The BEARER SETUP request indication requests to setup a bearer for ACCH2 which is associated with the traffic channel TCH2. The BEARER SETUP request indication contains a TACF-BCF relationship ID element, inter-BCF bearer ID element, user information rate element, and base station ID element, as represented in
Once the BCFv2 receives the BEARER SETUP request indication, the BCFv2 setup the requested bearer and sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation to the TACFv2 to confirm the BEARER SETUP request indication. The BEARER SETUP response confirmation contains a TACF-BCF relationship ID element and BCF-BCFr bearer ID element as represented in
When the TACFv2 receives the BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to the BCFr2 to request to setup a bearer between the BCF and BCFr and a radio bearer from the ACCH. The BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication contains a TACF-BCFr relationship ID element and bearer ID element as represented in
Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication, the BCFr2 in light of the link reference specifies the traffic channel TCH2 and enables to start the transmission through ACCH2. Then, the BCFr2 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to the TACFv2 to indicate that the request of the radio bearer setup is accepted and that the BCFr starts setting up the radio bearer for ACCH2. The RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication contains a TACF-BCFr relationship ID as represented in
Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication is sent from the visited TACFv2, which controls the newly assigned radio bearer, to the TACFa to request to setup a radio bearer for ACCH2 between the mobile terminal and the BCFr controlled by the visited TACF. The RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication contains a TACF-TACF relationship ID as represented in
Next, another RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is sent from the TACFa to TACAF to notify of the ACCH replacement handover execution initiation and to request to replace the existing physical radio channel for the first call with the designated physical radio channel for the ACCH. The RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication contains a call ID as represented in
Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication, the TACAF as shown in
Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication, the BCAF2 establishes the new ACCH and then sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation to the TACAF to indicate the completion of the radio bearer setup for the new ACCH. The RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation contains a TACAF-BCAF relationship ID as represented in
Then, the TACAF sends another RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation to the TACFa to indicate the completion of setting up of the radio bearer for the ACCH (ACCH2). The RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation contains a TACAF-BCAF relationship ID in the same fashion as that represented in
Next, the TACAF sends the BCAF1 a RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication to request to release the previous radio bearer. The RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication contains a TACAF-BCAF relationship ID as represented in
Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER RELEASE request indication, the BCAF1 releases the previously employed ACCH (ACCH1 associated with the traffic channel TCH1) and then replies a RADIO BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to the TACAF to indicate the completion of the radio bearer release. The RADIO BEARER RELEASE response confirmation contains a TACAF-BCAF relationship ID as represented in
On the other hand, when receiving the RADIO BEARER SETUP response confirmation, the TACFa sends the BCFa a HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE request indication to request to remove the previous bearer in the soft handover state. The HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE request indication contains a TACF-BCF relationship ID element and released bearer ID element as represented in
Upon the reception of the HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE request indication, the BCFa releases the previous DHT and sends a HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE response confirmation to the TACFa to confirm the HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE request indication. The HANDOVER CONNECTION RELEASE response confirmation contains a TACF-BCF relationship ID as represented in
Next, the TACFa sends the TACFv1 a BEARER RELEASE request indication to request to release the access bearer. The BEARER RELEASE request indication contains a TACF-TACF relationship ID as represented in
Upon the reception of the BEARER RELEASE request indication, the TACFv1 sends the BCFv1 another BEARER RELEASE request indication to request to release the bearer. The BEARER RELEASE request indication contains a TACF-BCF relationship ID as represented in
Upon the reception of the BEARER RELEASE request indication, the BCFv1 sends the TACFv1 another BEARER RELEASE request indication to confirm the BEARER RELEASE request indication, and then release the previous resources. The BEARER RELEASE response confirmation contains a TACF-BCF relationship ID element as represented in
Upon the reception of the BEARER RELEASE response confirmation, the TACFv1 sends the BCFr1 a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication to request to release the bearer between the BCF and BCFr and the radio bearer. The BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication contains a TACF-BCFr relationship ID element and a cause element as represented in
On the other hand, when receiving the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication, the BCFr1 stops the transmission. Then, the BCFr1 sends the TACFv1 a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation and then releases the previous resources. The BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation is a response to the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER request indication and indicates the completion of the release of the bearer and radio bearer. The BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation contains a TACF-BCFr relationship ID as represented in
Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation, the TACFv1 sends the TACFa a BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to confirm the BEARER RELEASE request indication. The BEARER RELEASE response confirmation contains a TACF-TACF relationship ID as represented in
In the above description of the ACCH replacement procedure, it is omitted to describe the procedure when the mobile station carries out the diversity handover for simplifying the description. If the mobile station 7 (refer to
In the ACCH replacement procedure, a wired access link is newly established between a base station controller at which the TACFa is disposed and a base station, and then the radio access link between the mobile terminal and the network is replaced. Accordingly, the ACCH replacement is accomplished.
However, in an alteration, it is possible to replace the ACCH without the new establishment of the wired access link. This alteration will be described with reference to
As represented in
Upon the reception of the RADIO ACCESS LINK SETUP response confirmation, the TACFa sends the TACFv1 an ACCH RELEASE request indication. Then, the TACFv1 further sends the ACCH RELEASE request indication to the BCFr1. As a result, the BCFr1 stops transmission through the existent ACCH, releases the existent ACCH and sends back the TACFv1 an ACCH RELEASE response confirmation. Then, the TACFv1 notifies the TACFa of the completion of the release of the existent ACCH.
In this procedure, since the ACCH replacement is accomplished by the functional entities illustrated in
2.4.3.5.8 Code Replacement
2.4.3.5.8.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.5.8.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Associated Information Elements
Information flows and information elements in
A CODE REPLACEMENT request indication is sent from a BCFr to a TACF to request change of codes. The detail of the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication is represented in
Another CODE REPLACEMENT request indication is sent from the visited TACF to a TACFa to request change of codes. The detail of the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication is represented in
Another CODE REPLACEMENT request indication is sent from the TACF to a TACAF to request change of codes. The detail of the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication is represented in
Another CODE REPLACEMENT request indication is sent from the TACAF to the BCAF to request to change of codes. The detail of the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication is represented in
A CODE REPLACEMENT response confirmation is a response to the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication and is sent from the BCAF to the TACAF to indicate the completion of the change of codes. The detail of the CODE REPLACEMENT response confirmation is represented in
Another CODE REPLACEMENT response confirmation is a response to the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication and is sent from the TACAF to the TACFa to confirm the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication. The detail of the CODE REPLACEMENT response confirmation is represented in
Another CODE REPLACEMENT response confirmation is sent from the TACFa to the TACFv to confirm the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication. The detail of the CODE REPLACEMENT response confirmation is represented in
Another CODE REPLACEMENT response confirmation is sent from the TACF to the BCFr to confirm the CODE REPLACEMENT request indication. The detail of the CODE REPLACEMENT response confirmation is represented in
2.4.3.6 Transmission Power Control
2.4.3.6.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.3.6.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Associated Information Elements
Information flows and information elements in
A CELL CONDITION REPORT request indication is sent from an MRRC to an RRC periodically to notify of the radio conditions of respective handover branches. The detail of the CELL CONDITION REPORT request indication is represented in
A TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL request indication is sent from a TACFa to TACFv to notify of the instructed transmission power. The detail of the TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL request indication is represented in
Another TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL request indication is sent from a TACFv to BCFr to notify of the instructed transmission power. The detail of the TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL request indication is represented in
2.4.4 Information Flows of Mobility Services
2.4.4.1 Terminal Location Updating
2.4.4.1.1 Common Procedure Modules Used
Common procedure modules used within the terminal location updating service are the TMUI inquiry, the FPLMTS user ID retrieval, the user authentication procedure, the ciphering start time notification, and the TMUI assignment.
2.4.4.1.2 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
2.4.4.1.3 Definitions of Information Flows and Associated Information Elements
Information flow in
Relationship rd (LRCF-LRDF)
An LAI UPDATE request indication is sent from the visited SCF to the SDF for requesting to update the location area information. A response confirmation is returned to the visited SCF from the SDF to confirm the completion of updating the location area information.
Relationship rk (SACF-LRCF)
A TERMINAL LOCATION UPDATE request indication is sent from the SACF to the visited SCF for requesting to update the location information of the mobile terminal. A response confirmation is returned to the SACF from the visited SCF to confirm the completion of updating the terminal location information.
Relationship rl (MCF-SACF)
Another TERMINAL LOCATION UPDATE request indication is sent from the MCF to the SACF for requesting to update the location information of the mobile terminal. A response confirmation is returned to the MCF from the SACF to confirm the completion of updating the terminal location information.
[Notes]
1) The relationship ID element identifies the relationship between requests and responses.
2) TMUI and TMUI assignment source ID should be used for the FPLMTS user ID element for relationships rl and rk.
3) The terminal status element indicates whether the terminal can accept a call or not.
4) The TC information is a terminal data information which indicates terminal capabilities.
2.4.5 Information Flows of Security Services
2.4.5.1 User Authentication
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
c) Definitions of Information Flows, Information Elements, and Functional Entity Actions
Information flows and functional entity actions in
Relationship rd (LRCF-LRDF)
An authentication information retrieval information flow is used to request the security information from the visited LRDF for the user authentication.
Relationship rg (LRCF-TACF) and Relationship rk (LRCF-SACF)
An AUTHENTICATION CHALLENGE IF is used to verify the identity of the user. That is, an authentication challenge initiated by a network is sent from LRCF to TACF/SACF for requesting the return of the authentication calculation result.
Relationship rb (TACFF-TACAF) and Relationship rl (SACF-MCF)
Another AUTHENTICATION CHALLENGE IF is used to verify the identity of the user. That is, an authentication challenge initiated by the network is sent from TACFF to TACAF and from SACF to MCF for requesting the return of the authentication calculation result.
Relationship rv (UIMF-TACAF) and Relationship ry (UIMF-MCF)
An AUTHENTICATION request indication is used to send a random number and to request to calculate a response with the random number and authentication key retained in the UIMF. An AUTHENTICATION response confirmation is used to send the authentication calculation result.
2.4.5.2 Ciphering Start Time Notification
2.4.5.2.1 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
c) Definitions of Information Flows, Information Elements, and Functional Entity Actions
Information flows and functional entity actions in
Relationship rb (TACF-TACAF)
A START CIPHERING request indication is used to request that the terminal begins to apply the encryption procedure to information transmitted between itself and the network. This needs a confirming information flow.
Relationship rg (LRCF-TACF)
Another START CIPHERING request indication is used to request that the terminal begins to apply the encryption procedure to information transmitted between itself and the network. This needs a confirming information flow.
Relationship rk (LRCF-SACF)
Another START CIPHERING request indication is used to request that the terminal begins to apply the encryption procedure to information transmitted between itself and the network. This needs a confirming information flow.
Relationship rl (SACF-MCF)
Another START CIPHERING request indication is used to request that the terminal begins to apply the encryption procedure to information transmitted between itself and the network. This needs a confirming information flow.
2.4.5.3. TMUI Management and User ID Retrieval
2.4.5.3.1 TMUI Assignment
2.4.5.3.1.1 Information Flow Diagram
a) Functional Model
b) Information Flows
c) Definitions of Information Flows, Information Elements, and Functional Entity Actions
Information flows and functional entity actions in
Relationship rb (TACF-TACAF)
A TMUI ASSIGNMENT request indication is used to assign and convey the TMUI to the user after the network has verified the identity of the user. A response confirmation is returned for acknowledging the successful assignment of the TMUI.
Relationship rd (LRCF-LRDF)
A TMUI QUERY IF is used to request a new TMUI available from the visited LRDF.
A TMUI MODIFY request indication is used to request the visited LRDF to modify the TMUI information for the user. Then, a confirmation is sent after it has been modified.
Relationship rg (LRCF-TACF)
Another TMUI ASSIGNMENT request indication is used to assign and convey the TMUI to the user after the network has verified the identity of the user. A response confirmation is returned for acknowledging the successful assignment of the TMUI.
Relationship rk (LRCF-SACF)
Another TMUI ASSIGNMENT request indication is used to assign and convey the TMUI to the user after the network has verified the identity of the user. A response confirmation is returned for acknowledging the successful assignment of the TMUI.
Relationship rl (SACF-MCF)
Another TMUI ASSIGNMENT request indication is used to assign and convey the TMUI to the user after the network has verified the identity of the user. A response confirmation is returned for acknowledging the successful assignment of the TMUI.
2.4.5.3.2 User ID Retrieval
This procedure is used to convert the TMUI to the IMUI of an FPLMTS user. This procedure is initiated by the newly visited network when the network receives the TMUI or a set of TMUI and TMUI assignment source ID as the FPLMTS user ID from the mobile terminal. When newly visited LRCF receives the TMUI or a set of TMUI and TMUI assignment source ID from the mobile terminal, the LRCF should analyze which procedure (selected from the following procedures) would be executed.
1) Terminal Location Registration and Update
Case A) TMUI has been assigned by the newly visited LRDF.
Case B) TMUI has been assigned by another LRDF.
In this rule, case B is not described.
2) Mobile Originating Call
3) Unsuccessful Case: If the newly visited network cannot retrieve successfully (e.g., loses TMUI), then the newly visited network attempts to retrieve the FPLMTS user's IMUI from the UIMF.
2.4.5.3.2.1 Information Flow Diagram
2.4.5.3.2.2 Information Flows and Associated Information Elements
Relationship rd (LRCF-LRDF)
An IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve an IMUI on the basis of its corresponding TMUI. This information flow is sent from the LRCF to the LRDF in the same network. An IMUI RETRIEVAL response confirmation is a response to the request indication. The details of the IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication and response confirmation are represented in
Relationship rl (SACF-LRCF)
Another IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve the IMUI from the mobile terminal. This information flow is used only when the network does not convert the TMUI of the FPLMT user into the IMUI. This information flow is sent from the SCF to the SACF in the visited network. An IMUI RETRIEVAL response confirmation is a response to the request. The details of the IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication and response confirmation are represented in
Relationship rk (MCF-SACF)
Another IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve the IMUI from the mobile terminal. This information flow is used only when the network does not convert the TMUI of the FPLMT user into the IMUI. This information flow is sent from the SACF to the MCF in the visited network. An IMUI RETRIEVAL response confirmation is a response to the request. The details of the IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication and response confirmation are represented in
Relationship rg (TACF-LRCF)
Another IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve the IMUI from the mobile terminal. This information flow is used only when the network does not convert the TMUI of the FPLMT user into the IMUI. This information flow is sent from the LRCF to the TACF in the visited network. An IMUI RETRIEVAL response confirmation is a response to the request. The details of the IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication and response confirmation are represented in
Relationship rb (TACAF-TACF)
Another IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication is used to retrieve the IMUI from the mobile terminal. This information flow is used only when the network does not convert the TMUI of the FPLMT user into the IMUI. This information flow is sent from the TACF to the TACAF in the visited network. An IMUI RETRIEVAL response confirmation is a response to the request. The details of the IMUI RETRIEVAL request indication and response confirmation are represented in
2.4.6 SDL Diagrams
SDL diagrams for functional entities (
2.5 Protocol Specifications
2.5.1 Reference Configuration
The correlation between physical node configuration and functional entities in the invented system is represented in
2.5.2 Radio Interface Specification
2.5.2.1 General
Section 2.5.2 describes layer 1-3 protocol specifications for the radio interface.
2.5.2.2 Layer 1
The description in connection with layer 1 protocol is omitted.
2.5.2.3 Layer 2
2.5.2.3.1 General
Layer 2 consists of a LAC (link access control) sub-layer and a MAC (medium access control) sub-layer. The LAC sub-layer consists of a layer-3-coordination sub-sub-layer and an LLC (logical link control) sub-sub-layer.
2.5.2.3.1.1 LAC (Link Access Control) Sub-Layer
The LAC transfers variable length service data units (SDUs) between users at layer 2 with high reliability.
2.5.2.3.1.1.1 Layer-3-Coordination Sub-Sub-Layer
The layer-3-coordination sub-sub-layer performs primitive/parameter mapping between LLC and layer 3, and disassembles/assembles a layer data unit to/from LLC SDUs.
2.5.2.3.1.1.2 LLC (Logical Link Control) Sub-Sub-Layer
The LLC sub-sub-layer offers a high-reliability transfer function using error control, flow control, and so on.
2.5.2.3.1.2 MAC (Medium Access Control) Sub-Layer
The MAC sub-layer detects an error of LLC PDUs and disassembles/assembles an LLC PDU to/from layer 1 frames.
2.5.2.3.2 Functions
2.5.2.3.2.1 Functions of LAC (Link Access Control) Sub-Layer
2.5.2.3.2.1.1 Layer-3-Coordination Sub-Sub-Layer
a) Signaling Layer 3 PDU Assembly and Disassembly
This function provides for assembling a signaling layer 3 data unit from LLC PDUs and for disassembling a signaling layer 3 PDU to LLC PDUs.
b) Link Control
This function specifies the layer 3 entity which should process the LAC SDU with the SAPI. The application should be studied further.
c) Code Type Identification
This function identifies the code type when adopting the hybrid ARQ.
2.5.2.3.2.1.2 LLC (Logical Link Control) Sub-Sub-Layer
a) Sequence Integrity
This function preserves the order of LLC SDUs that were submitted for transfer by this layer.
b) Error Correction by Selective Retransmission
Through a sequencing mechanism, the receiving LLC entity can detect missing LLC SDUs. This function corrects the sequence errors by means of retransmission.
c) Flow Control
This function allows an LLC receiver to control the rate at which a peer LLC transmitter entity may send information.
d) Error Reporting to Layer Management
This function indicates to layer management errors which have occurred.
e) Keep Alive
This function verifies that two peer LLC entities participating in a link are remaining in a link connection established state even in the case of a prolonged absence of data transfer.
f) Local Data Retrieval
This function allows the local LLC user to retrieve in-sequence SDUs which have not yet been released by the LLC entity.
g) Connection Control
This function performs the establishment, release, and resynchronization of an LLC link. It also allows the transmission of variable length user-to-user information without a guarantee of delivery.
h) Transfer of User-Data
This function is used for the conveyance of user data between users of the LLC. LLC supports both assured and unassured data transfer.
i) Protocol Error Detection and Recovery
This function detects errors and recovers from errors in the operation of the protocol.
j) Status Reporting
This function allows a transmitter peer entity and a receiver peer entity to exchange status information.
2.5.2.3.2.2 Functions of MAC (Medium Access Control) Sub-Layer
a) CRC Error Detection and Handling
This function provides for detecting and handling LLC PDU corruption by means of CRC. Corrupted LLC PDUs are discarded.
b) Assembly and Disassembly of LLC PDU or BTS Layer 3 PDU from/to Layer 1 Frames
This function provides for assembling an LLC PDU or BTS layer 3 PDU from layer 1 frames and for disassembling an LLC PDU or BTS layer 3 PDU to layer 1 frames.
This function includes the padding function to extend the length of the MAC PDU to an integer multiple of the length of layer 1 frames. Before transferring through the RACH, a sequence number should be attached in order to prevent the MAC PDU from being received twice.
c) Address Control
This function identifies the logical link in the RACH/FACH, e.g., for respective mobile terminals, using a personal identity system.
d) Identity of Signal Content
This function classifies information, transmitted over the RACH, FACH, and UPCH, into user information or control information.
e) Identity of Terminating Node
This function classifies nodes, where signals are terminated, into the BTS function node and the BSC function node.
2.5.2.3.3 Formats and Parameters of Data Units
2.5.2.3.3.1 Format and Parameters of PDUS in LAC Sub-Layer
2.5.2.3.3.1.1 Layer 3 Compatible Sub-Sub-Layer PDU
a) SAPI (Service Access Point Identifier)
This indicates to layer 3 the type of service provided by layer 2. This parameter is represented in
b) ST
This parameter is attached to layer 3 compatible sub-sub-layer PDUs when disassembling a layer 3 PDU to those. This parameter is referred for future assembling a layer 3 PDU estimation from those in the correct order. This parameter is represented in
c) Code Type Indicator
This parameter indicates the type of code to adopt the hybrid ARQ. The adoption shall depend on the version. This parameter is represented in
d) Reserved Parameter
This parameter indicates the version of layer-3-coordination sub-sub-layer, and so on. This parameter is represented in
2.5.2.3.3.1.2 LLC PDUS
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.1 Types of LLC PDUS
Various types of LLC protocol data units (PDUs) are listed in
a) BGN PDU (Begin)
The BGN PDU is used to establish an LLC link between two peer entities. The BGN PDU requests to clear peer's transmitter and receiver buffers, and to initialize peer's transmitter and receiver state variables.
b) BGAK PDU (Begin Acknowledge)
The BGAK PDU is used to acknowledge the acceptance of a layer 2 link setup request from a peer.
c) BGREJ PDU (Begin Reject)
The BGREJ PDU is used to reject the layer 2 link setup request of the peer LLC entity.
d) End PDU (End)
The END PDU is used to release an LLC link between two peer entities.
e) ENDAK PDU (End Acknowledge)
The ENDAK PDU is used to acknowledge the release of an LLC link.
f) RS PDU (Resynchronization)
The RS PDU is used to resynchronize the buffers and data transfer state variables.
g) RSAK PDU (Resynchronization Acknowledge)
The RSAK PDU is used to acknowledge the acceptance of a resynchronization requested by the peer LLC entity.
h) ER PDU (Error Recovery)
The ER PDU is used to recover from protocol error.
i) ERAK PDU (Error Recovery Acknowledge)
The ERAK PDU is used to acknowledge the recovery from protocol error.
j) SD PDU (Sequenced Data)
The SD PDU is used to transfer, through an LLC link, sequentially numbered PDUs containing information fields provided by the LLC user.
k) POLL PDU (Status Request)
The POLL PDU is used to request, across an LLC link, to transmit status information about the peer LLC entity.
l) STAT PDU (Solicited States Response)
The STAT PDU is used to respond to a status request (POLL PDU) received from a peer LLC entity. It contains information regarding the reception status of SD PDUs and SD-with-POLL PDUs in the N(R) field, credit information for the peer transmitter in the N(MR) field, and the sequence number in the N(PS) field corresponding to the POLL PDU or SD-with-POLL PDU to which it is in response.
m) USTAT PDU (Unsolicited States Response)
The USTAT PDU is used to respond to a detection of one or more new missing SD PDUs, based on the examination of the sequence number of the SD PDU. It contains information regarding the reception status of SD PDUs in the N(R) field, and an upper-window-edge information for the peer transmitter in the N(MR) field.
n) SD-with-POLL PDU (Sequenced Data with Status Request)
The SD-with-POLL PDU is used to transfer, through an LLC link, sequentially numbered PDUs containing information fields provided by the LLC user and used to request status information about the peer LLC entity.
o) UD PDU (Unnumbered Data PDU)
The UD PDU is used for unassured data transfer between two LLC users. When an LLC user requests unacknowledged information transfer, the UD PDU is used to send information to the peer without affecting LLC states or variables. The UD PDUs does not carry a sequence number and therefore, the UD PDU may be lost without notification.
p) MD PDU (Management Data PDU)
The MD PDU is used for transferring unassured management data between two management entities. When a management entity requests unacknowledged information transfer, the MD PDU is used to send information to the peer management entity without affecting LLC states or variables. The MD PDU does not carry a sequence number and therefore, the MD PDU may be lost without notification.
An invalid PDU is a PDU which:
a) has an unknown PDU type code, or
b) is not of the proper length of the PDU belonging to the stated types.
Invalid PDUs shall be discarded without notification to the sender. No additional action is taken as a result of the invalid PDU. Length violations from items b) and c) above are reported to layer management.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.2 Formats of LLC PDUS
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.2.1 Coding Conventions
The coding of the LLC PDU conforms to the coding conventions specified in 2.1/1.361[4]. LLC PDU is trailer oriented: i.e., the protocol control information is transmitted last.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.2.2 Reserved Field
There is a field of reserved bits (that may be referred to as R, Rsvd, Reserved) in each PDU. One function of the reserved field is to achieve the eight-bit alignment of PDU. Other functions should be studied further. When no functions other than the eight-bit-alignment are defined, this field shall be coded as zero. This field shall be ignored by the receiver.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.2.3 PDU Length
The maximum length of the information fields in SD, UD, and MD PDUs is k octets. The maximum value of k should be studied further. The value of k is determined at part of size negotiation procedures carried out outside LLC, upon bilateral agreement, and may be specified by another Recommendation utilizing LLC, or may be derived from the maximum length PDU size for protocols using LLC. The minimum value of k is 0 octets.
The maximum length of a variable length SSCOP-UU field is j octets. The maximum value of j should be studied further. The value of j is determined upon bilateral agreement, may be specified by another Recommendation utilizing LLC, or may be derived from requirements of protocols utilizing LLC. The minimum value of j is 0 octets.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.2.4 Codings of STAT and USTAT PDU
Each USTAT PDU contains two list elements. Each STAT PDU contains zero or more list elements. Transmitted STAT messages may be segmented into two or more STAT PDUs.
The processing of a STAT PDU does not rely on information in other STAT PDUs. This is true even for the case when multiple STAT PDUs are generated in response to a single POLL PDU, and one or more of these PDUs are lost.
The span list items in the STAT and USTAT PDUs are odd or even elements of a list used for selective retransmission requests. Every odd element represents the first PDU of a missing gap, and every even element, except possibly the last one, represents the first PDU of a received sequence.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.2.5 States of LLC Protocol Entity
This sub-clause describes the states of an LLC entity. These states are used in the specification of the peer-to-peer protocol. The states are conceptual and reflect general conditions of the LLC entity in the sequences of signals and PDU exchanges with its user and peer, respectively. In addition, other conditions are used in the description, in order to avoid identification of additional states, as detailed in the SDLs. The basic states will be described below.
State 1 (Idle)
Each LLC entity is conceptually initiated in an Idle state (state 1) and returns to this state upon the release of a connection.
State 2 (Outgoing Connection Pending)
An LLC entity requesting a connection with a peer is in an outgoing connection pending state (state 2) until it receives an acknowledgement from the peer.
State 3 (Incoming Connection Pending)
An LLC entity that has received a connection request from a peer and is waiting for its user's response is in an incoming connection pending (state 3).
State 4 (Outgoing Disconnection Pending)
An LLC entity requesting release of the peer-to-peer connection is in an outgoing disconnection pending state (state 4) until it receives a confirmation that the peer entity has released and transitioned to the Idle state (State 1).
State 5 (Outgoing Resynchronization Pending)
An LLC entity requesting resynchronization of the connection with a peer is in an outgoing resynchronization pending state (state 5).
State 6 (Incoming Resynchronization Pending)
An LLC entity that has received a resynchronization request from a peer and is waiting for its user's response is in an incoming resynchronization pending state (state 5).
State 7 (Outgoing Recovery Pending)
An LLC entity requesting recovery of an existing connection with a peer is in an outgoing recovery pending state (state 7).
State 8 (Recovery Response Pending)
An LLC entity that has completed recovery, notified its user of the recovery completion, and is awaiting for a response from the user is in a recovery response pending state (state 8).
State 9 (Incoming Recovery Pending)
An LLC entity that has received a recovery request from a peer and is waiting for its user's response is in an incoming recovery pending state (state 9).
State 10 (Data Transfer Ready)
Upon successful completion of the connection establishment, resynchronization, or error recovery procedures, both peer LLC entities will be in a data transfer ready state (state 10) and possible to execute data transfer.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.4 LLC State Variables
This section describes the state variables used in the peer-to-peer protocol. SD and POLL PDUs are sequentially and independently numbered, and may have a value between “0” and n minus 1 (where n is the modulus of the sequence number). The modulus equals to 28, and therefore, the sequence number cycles through the entire range between 0 through 28-1. Therefore, all arithmetic operations on the following state variables or sequence numbers are affected by the modulus: VT(S), VT(PS), VT(A), VT(PA), VT(MS), VR(R), VR(H), and VR(MR). When performing arithmetic comparisons of transmitter variables, VT(A) is assumed as a base. When performing arithmetic comparisons of receiver variables, VR(R) is assumed as a base. In addition, the state variables VT(SQ) and VR(SQ) use the modulo 256 arithmetic. The LLC sub-sub-layer manages the following state variables at the transmitter.
a) VT(S)—Sending State Variable
This is the sequence number of an SD PDU to be transmitted next in the first transmission (i.e. except for that in retransmissions). This is incremented after sending each SD PDU in the first transmission (i.e. except in retransmissions).
b) VT(PS)—Poll Sending State Variable
This is the sequence number of a POLL PDU or SD-with-POLL PDU transmitted currently. This is incremented before transmission of the next POLL or SD-with-POLL PDU.
c) VT(A)—Acknowledgement State Variable
This is the sequence number of an in-sequence SD PDU which is expected to be acknowledged next and forms the lower edge of an acknowledgement window acknowledging SD PDUs. The variable VT(A) is updated in response to the acknowledgement of transmitted SD PDUs.
d) VT(PA)—Poll Acknowledgement State Variable
This is the sequence number of an STAT PDU which is expected to be received next and forms the lower edge of the acknowledgement window constituted of STAT PDUs. If an STAT PDU containing an invalid parameter at the N(PS) field is received, a recovery is initiated or release is performed. Otherwise, if an acceptable STAT PDU is received, the variable VT(PA) is updated on the basis of the parameter at the N(PS) field of the received STAT PDU.
e) VT(MS)—Maximum Sendable Value State Variable
This is the sequence number of an SD PDU which is not allowed by the peer receiver. That is, the peer receiver sequentially receives SD PDUs having sequence numbers up to VT(MS)-1. The variable VT(MS) represents the upper edge of the transmission window. The transmitter should not transmit a new SD PDU if the current VT(S) reaches VT(MS). The variable VT(MS) is updated in response to the reception of a USTAT PDU, STAT PDU, BGN PDU, BGAK PDU, RS PDU, RSAK PDU, ER PDU, or ERAK PDU.
f) VT(PD)—POLL Data State Variable
When acknowledgements are outstanding, this state variable represents the number of SD PDUs transmitted between transmissions of two POLL PDUs, or the number of SD PDUs transmitted before the transmission of the first POLL PDU after a POLL timer became active. The variable VT(PD) is incremented in response to the transmission of an SD PDU, and reset to zero in response to the transmission of a POLL PDU.
g) VT(CC)-Connection Control State Variable
This variable represents the number of unacknowledged BGN, END, ER, or RS PDUs. The variable VT(CC) is incremented in response to the transmission of a BGN, END, ER, or RS PDU. If an END PDU is transmitted in response to a protocol error, LLC sub-sub-layer does not wait for receiving the corresponding ENDAK PDU and enters directly into state 1 (Idle) and the variable VT(CC) is not incremented
h) VT(SQ)-Transmitter Connection Sequence State Variable
This state variable is used to allow the receiver to identify retransmitted BGN, ER, and RS PDUs. This state variable is initialized to “0” in response to creation of the LLC process and incremented and then mapped into the N(SQ) field of a BGN, RS, or ER PDU before the initial transmission of the BGN, RS, or ER PDU as represented in
Additionally, the LLC sub-sub-layer manages the following state variables at the receiver.
a) VR(R)—Reception State Variable
This state variable is the sequence number of an in-sequence SD PDU expected to be received next. This variable is incremented in response to the reception of the next SD PDU.
b) VR(H)—Highest Expected Reception State VARIABLE
This state variable is the highest number among sequence numbers of in-sequence SD PDUs in a transmission window expected to be received next. The variable VR(H) may be updated in response to the reception of a new SD PDU or in response to the reception of a POLL PDU.
c) VR(MR)—Maximum Receivable Value State Variable
This is the sequence number of an SD PDU which is not allowed by the receiver. That is, the receiver sequentially receives SD PDUs having sequence numbers up to VR(MR)-1. The receiver should discard the SD PDU having the parameter in the N(S) field being equal to or more than VR(MR). It is possible that the reception of such an SD PDU causes the transmission of a USTAT PDU. Updating manner of the variable VR(MR) can be optional with the device, but the variable VR(MR) should not be less than VR(H).
d) VR(SQ)—Receiver Connection Sequence State Variable
This state variable is used to identify retransmitted BGN, ER, and RS PDUs. In reaction to the reception of a BGN, ER, or RS PDU, this state variable is compared with the value in the N(SQ) field of the received BGN, ER, or RS PDU, and then the value in the N(SQ) field is allocated to the variable VR(SQ). In the comparison, if they are different, the PDU is processed and the variable VR(SQ) is set to the parameter in the N(SQ) field. If they are equal to each other, the PDU is identified as a retransmitted one.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.5 LLC PDU Parameter Fields
a) N(S)
The variable VT(S) is mapped to the N(S) field of a new SD, SD-with-POLL, or POLL PDU whenever the new SD, SD-with-POLL, or POLL PDU is generated as represented in
b) Information Field
The information field of an SD, SD-with-POLL, MD, or UD PDU represented in
c) N(PS)
After the variable VT(PS) has been incremented, the variable VT(PS) is mapped to the N(PS) field of an SD-with-POLL or POLL PDU whenever the SD-with-POLL or POLL PDU is generated as represented in
d) N(R)
The variable VR(R) is mapped to the N(R) field of a STAT or USTAT PDU whenever the STAT or USTAT PDU is generated as represented in
e) N(MR)
The variable VR(MR) is mapped to the N(MR) field of an STAT, USTAT, RS, RSAK, ER, ERAK, BGN, or BGAK PDU whenever such a PDU is generated as represented in
f) SSCOP-UU
The SSCOP-UU in a BGN, BGAK, BGREJ, END or RS PDU in
g) SOURCE BIT (S)
In an END PDU, the source bit (S) field in
h) N(SQ)
This field carries the connection sequence value. The variable VT(SQ) is mapped to the N(SQ) field of a new BGN, RS, or ER PDU whenever the new BGN, RS, or ER PDU is transmitted. The parameter in this field is used by the receiver with the variable VR(SQ) to identify retransmitted BGN, RS, and ER PDUs.
i) PDU Type Field
Codings with respect to the PDU type field is represented in the list formed by
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.6 LLC Timer
Description with respect to the LLC timer will be omitted.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.7 LLC Protocol Parameters
LLC protocol parameters will be described below.
a) Max-CC
This is the maximum number of the state variable VT(CC) and corresponds to the maximum limit of transmissions of a BGN, END, ER, or RS PDU.
b) Max-PD
This is the maximum number of the state variable VT(PD) before sending a POLL PDU and resetting VT(PD) to zero.
c) Max-STAT
This is the maximum number of list elements which can be contained in an STAT PDU. When the number of list items exceeds the Max-STAT, the STAT message shall be segmented. All of the PDUs carrying the segments made from an STAT message, except possibly the last one, contain Max-STAT list items. This parameter is not used for length check by the receiver of an STAT PDU, but is only used by the sender of the STAT message for segmentation purposes. This parameter should be an odd integer greater than or equal to 3. The default value of the Max-STAT should be studied further. This parameter can be changed dependently on the device.
The default value causes the STAT PDU to fill six ATM cells using AAL type 5 common part. In addition, the total length of a STAT PDU should not exceed the maximum length of an SD PDU.
d) Clear-Buffers
This parameter is set upon connection establishment. It holds one of two values indicating “Yes” or “No,” respectively. If this parameter is set to “Yes,” the LLC sub-sub-layer can clear its transmission buffer and release transmission queue in response to a connection release. If this parameter is set to “No,” the LLC sub-sub-layer can not clear its transmission buffer and release transmission queue even if connection release occurs. Additionally, if this parameter is set to “No,” the LLC sub-sub-layer cannot clear selectively acknowledged messages from its transmission buffer if older ones are still outstanding.
e) Credit
This parameter is used to coordinate credit notifications to layer management. When the LLC sub-sub-layer is blocked from transmitting a new SD or SD-with-POLL PDU due to insufficient credit, the credit parameter is assigned the value indicating “No.” When the LLC sub-sub-layer is permitted to transmit a new SD or SD-with-POLL PDU, the credit parameter is assigned to the value indicating “Yes.” The credit parameter is initially assigned “Yes.”
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.8 LLC Credit and Flow Control
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.8.1 Credit and Peer-to-Peer Flow Control
Credit is granted by the LLC receiver to allow the peer LLC transmitter to transmit new SD or SD-with-POLL PDUs. The process by which a receiver entity determined credit is optional, but is related to the buffer availability and the bandwidth and delay of the connection.
The variable VR(MR) is contained in the N(MR) field of each of BGN, BGAK, RS, RSAK, ER, ERAK, STAT and USTAT PDUs sent by the receiver, and then conveyed to the transmitter. The content of the N(MR) field is read out and stored as the variable VT(MS) at the transmitter. The variable VR(MR) sent to the transmitter is the sequence number of SD or SD-with-POLL PDU that the receiver will not accept.
The transmitter does not transmit any SD or SD-with-POLL PDU having the sequence number which exceeds the credit allowed. The receiver discards any SD or SD-with-POLL PDUs having the sequence number which exceeds the credit allowed. In one case, reception of such an SD or SD-with-POLL PDU may cause the transmission of a USTAT PDU.
Previously granted credit can be reduced in order for the receiver to perform flow control, but the receiver credit variable VR(MR) cannot be reduced below the variable VR(H). In other words, if a receiver has accepted and acknowledged the receipt of the SD or SD-with-POLL PDU having the sequence number which is VR(H)-1, the credit value VR(MR) must be greater than or equal to VR(H).
The lower bound of the operating window according to the LLC protocol is the variable VT(A) while the upper bound thereof is VT(MS)-1. The modulus of the protocol limits the sequence number range of the operating window to 28-1. Therefore, the acceptable sequence number (granted credit) at the receiver by the modulo arithmetic must be a value between VR(H) and VR(R)-1. If VR(MR)=VR(R)=VR(H), the operating window size is zero. If VR(MR)=VR(R)-1, the operating window size is maximum.
The LLC receiver allocates a buffer to support each connection. In principle, the available receiver buffer should match or exceed the credit granted to the transmitter to avoid the discard of successfully transmitted data. However, if limited buffers are available for a connection, it is possible to grant credit in excess of the available buffer capacity. This method may obtain a higher throughput than can be achieved by limiting the credit to the availed buffer, with the possibility that data may need to be discarded if errors occur. The receiver cannot discard previously received and acknowledged, but not yet delivered, SD or SD-with-POLL PDUs. In addition, the receiver must allocate sufficient buffer capacity to receive and deliver the SD or SD-with-POLL PDU with the sequence number which is equal to VR(R) at all times unless VR(R)=VR(H)=VR(MR). The granting of credit in excess of buffer capacity should only be performed if limited buffers are available to support the connection and if the LLC receiver can still maintain the quality of service (QOS) required for the connection through this method.
2.5.2.3.3.1.2.8.2 Local Flow Control
LLC events, such as receptions of PDUs and external and internal signals, are normally processed in the order in which they occurred. However, events pertaining to the exchange of LLC link status information have priority over other data transfer.
A device may detect congestion (for example, a long queuing delay) in its lower protocol layers. In this case, data transfer should be suspended in order to give priority to connection control messages. The means, by which an LLC entity decides whether or not congestion occurs, depends on the protocol environment, including protocol timer values.
If an LLC entity detects a local congestion (“lower layer busy”), it can elect to suspend the servicing AA-DATA request signals, AA-UNITDATA request signals, and MAA-UNITDATA request signals. It can also suspend the retransmission of requested SD or SD-with-POLL PDUs. The data transfer procedures allow this to occur without causing protocol errors.
Therefore, when transmitting PDUs to the peer receiver, all types of PDUs except for SD PDU, SD-with-POLL PDU, MD PDU, and UD PDU are given highest priority. The SD PDUs, SD-with-POLL PDUs, MD PDUs, and UD PDUs have equal priority. Retransmissions of SD PDUs have priority over new transmissions of SD PDUs if both PDU types are pending. These priorities are only internal to the LLC. The LLC's local flow control at user's interface is dependent on the device.
2.5.2.3.3.2. Format and Parameters of MAC PDU in MAC Sub-Layer and Frame Formats and Parameters on Logical Channels
In the following, the format and parameters of an MAC PDU in the MAC sub-layer and frame formats and parameters on logical channels will be described with reference to
a) PAD
A PAD field is included in an MAC PDU (MAC sub-layer frame) to extend the length of the MAC PDU to an integer multiple of the length of a layer 1 frame (extend to integer octets). The bit or all bits in the PAD field should be “0.”
b) Length
A length field is interposed in the MAC PDU for indicating the amount of the MAC PDU including the PAD field by the octet.
c) CRC
A CRC field including an error detection code is attached to each MAC PDU, so that the receiver can detect any errors. The result should be used for a determination by a higher layer protocol as to whether the frame should be retransmitted.
d) ST
A segment type (ST) field is included in each layer 1 frame for indicating that the corresponding layer 1 frame is the top, middle, or end of the original MAC PDU. The segment type is attached when an MAC PDU is disassembled to layer 1 frames, and referred when an MAC PDU evaluation is assembled from the layer 1 frames.
e) Others
A BI field in the layer 1 frame in
An SFN field in the layer 1 frame in
An uplink interference field in the layer 1 frame in
A PID field in the layer 1 frame in either of
A U/C field in the layer 1 frame on the RACH, FACH or UPCH represented in either of
A TN field in the layer 1 frame on the RACH, FACH, or UPCH represented in either of
An MO field in the short layer 1 frame on the FACH represented in
A CRC field including an error detection code is attached to each layer 1 frame as represented in
An S field is attached to the short layer 1 frame on the RACH as represented in
A TA field in the layer 1 frames represented in either of
A D field represented in either of
2.5.2.4 Layer 3 Messages
Next, messages of layer 3 of the invented system will be described. In the following description, ITU-T Recommendations X, I, and Q series will be sometimes shortened to X, I, and Q.
2.5.2.4.1 Protocol Architecture
First, the protocol architecture of layer 3 will be described.
2.5.2.4.2 Message Formats
Next, message formats for layer 3 will be described.
2.5.2.4.2.1 Formats of CC Entity Messages
First, CC (call/connection control) entity messages will be described.
2.5.2.4.2.1.1 Alerting Message
First, an alerting message will be described. The alerting message is transferred from a called user to the network and then transferred from the network to a calling user in order to indicate that calling procedure of the called user is started.
In the list formed by
2.5.2.4.2.1.2 Call Proceeding Message
Next, a call proceeding message will be described. The call proceeding message is transferred from the network to a calling user or from a called user to the network in order to indicate that requested call setup is initiated and no additional call setup will be accepted.
2.5.2.4.2.1.3 Connect Message
Next, a connect message will be described. The connect message is transferred from a called user to the network and from the network to a calling user in order to indicate that requested call is accepted by the called user.
As represented in this list, if the called user wants to reply the calling user the broadband low layer compatibility information, the broadband low layer compatibility information element is included in the connect message from the called user to the network. If the connect message from the called user to the network includes the broadband low layer compatibility information element, the broadband low layer compatibility information element is also included in the connect message from the network to the calling user. For the broadband low layer information negotiation, this information element is included in the connect message as an option, but some network may not transfer this information element to the calling user.
2.5.2.4.2.1.4 Connect Acknowledge Message
Next, a connect acknowledge message will be described. The connect acknowledge message is transferred from the network to a called user in order to indicate that the call is established for the called user. In addition, the connect acknowledge message is transferred from a calling user to the network in order to enable symmetric call control procedure.
The notification identifier information element is included if the notification procedure is applied. A plurality of notification identifier information elements can be included in this message. The maximum length and the allowable number of the elements depend on the network.
2.5.2.4.2.1.5 Progress Message
Next, a progress message will be described. The progress message is transferred from the network or either of users in order to indicate the event as a call progress when the interworking is taken place.
2.5.2.4.2.1.6 Setup Message
Next, a setup message will be described. The setup message is transferred from a calling user to the network and from the network to a called user in order to initiate a call setup.
2.5.2.4.2.1.7 Release Message
Next, a release message will be described. The release message is transferred from the network or either of users in order to initiate that the device transmitting the release message has disconnected the FPLMTS connection for releasing connection identifier (if connection identifier is used) and call reference. The device which has received the release message should release the connection identifier, transmit a release complete message, and then release the call reference. The above description about the connection identifier will be valid only when the ATM will be applied on air interface in the future.
2.5.2.4.2.1.8 Release Complete Message
Next, a release complete message will be described. The release complete message is transferred from the network or either of users in order to initiate that the device transmitting the release complete message has released the connection identifier (if connection identifier is used) and call reference. The connection identifier can be reused by releasing. The device which has received the release complete message should release the call reference. The above description about the connection identifier will be valid only when the ATM will be applied on air interface in the future.
2.5.2.4.2.1.9 Information Message
Next, an information message will be described. The information message is transferred from the network or either of users in order to provide additional information, more specifically, additional information for call setup (e.g., overlap sending) or various information related to call.
2.5.2.4.2.2 Format of MM-T Entity Message
Next, MM-T (terminal mobility management) entity message will be described.
2.5.2.4.2.2.1 Message Belonging to MM-T Entity Message
With respect to various messages including the mobility facility message and others, discrimination can be carried out by the message type information element. That is, if more significant three bits in the message type information element are “011,” the corresponding message belongs to messages prescribed in Q.2931. In addition, if the less significant five bits are “00010,” the corresponding message belongs to messages prescribed in Q.2932. Otherwise, the corresponding message is the mobility facility message.
2.5.2.4.2.2.2 Mobility Facility Message
2.5.2.4.2.2.3 Facility
The facility information of the mobility facility message in
(a) Mobility Facility Message from MS to Network for Terminal Location Registration
(b) Mobility Facility Message from Network to MS for Terminal Location Registration
When the terminal location should be updated or when the mobile station roams, another type of mobility facility message (as a response message to the request of terminal location registration) is transferred from the network to the mobile station. This response message can be classified into three sorts represented in three lists of
(b-1) Response Message Indicating “Return Result”
When the terminal location has been normally registered, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return result” represented in
(b-2) Response Message Indicating “Return Error”
When an abnormality, for example, an application error has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(b-3) Response Message Indicating “Reject”
When an abnormality, for example, a discrepancy of an information element has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(c) Mobility Facility Message from Network to MS for TMUI Assignment
(d) Mobility Facility Message from MS to Network for TMUI Assignment
Another type of mobility facility message (as a response message to the TMUI assignment) is transferred from the mobile station to the network. This response message can be classified into three sorts represented in three lists of
(d-1) Response Message Indicating “Return Result”
When the TMUI has been normally assigned, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return result” represented in
(d-2) Response Message Indicating “Return Error”
When an abnormality, for example, an application error has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(d-3) Response Message Indicating “Reject”
When an abnormality, for example, a discrepancy of an information element has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(e) Mobility Facility Message from Network to MS for Authentication Challenge
(f) Mobility Facility Message from MS to Network for Authentication Challenge
Another type of mobility facility message (as a response message to the authentication challenge) is transferred from the mobile station to the network. This response message can be classified into three sorts represented in three lists of
(f-1) Response Message Indicating “Return Result”
When the authentication has been normally requested, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return result” represented in
(f-2) Response Message Indicating “Return Error”
When an abnormality, for example, an application error has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(f-3) Response Message Indicating “Reject”
When an abnormality, for example, a discrepancy of an information element has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(g) Mobility Facility Message from Network to MS for Ciphering Start Notification
(h) Mobility Facility Message from MS to Network FOR Ciphering Start Notification
Another type of mobility facility message (as a response message to the ciphering start notification) is transferred from the mobile station to the network. This response message can be classified into three sorts represented in three lists of
(h-1) Response Message Indicating “Return Result”
When the ciphering onset has been normally notified, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return result” represented in
(h-2) Response Message Indicating “Return Error”
When an abnormality, for example, an application error has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(h-3) Response Message Indicating “Reject”
When an abnormality, for example, a discrepancy of an information element has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(i) Mobility Facility Message from Network to MS for IMUI Retrieval
(j) Mobility Facility Message from MS to Network for IMUI Retrieval
Another type of mobility facility message (as a response message to the IMUI inquiry) is transferred from the mobile station to the mobile service switching center. This response message can be classified into three sorts represented in three lists of
(j-1) Response Message Indicating “Return Result”
When the IMUI has been normally inquired, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return result” represented in
(j-2) Response Message Indicating “Return Error”
When an abnormality, for example, an application error has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
(j-3) Response Message Indicating “Reject”
When an abnormality, for example, a discrepancy of an information element has occurred, the mobility facility message (response message) indicating “return error” represented in
2.5.2.4.2.3 Format of RBC Entity Message
Next, RBC (radio bearer control) entity message will be described.
2.5.2.4.2.3.1 Messages Belonging to RBC Entity Message
2.5.2.4.2.3.2 Classification of RBC Entity Message
RBC entity message can be classified into two types: one relates to setup and release of bearer so as to cause an RBC ID to change; and the other relates to maintain bearer so as not to cause an RBC ID to change.
2.5.2.4.2.3.3.1 Basic Message Format
Next, the basic format of RBC entity message will be described. Each EBC entity message comprises a fundamental part and an optional extensional part. The fundamental part is constituted of one or more message-specific-parameter fields and one or more optional fundamental information fields.
Message-specific-parameter field in
Each fundamental information field includes at least one parameter in conformance with the procedure that the message initiates. In other words, fundamental information elements in RBC entity messages vary with the necessary procedure. Fundamental information field can be used without any design change of the invented system.
On the contrary, extensional information field may be used if the performance of the invented system is extended.
Operation indicator field asterisked in
2.5.2.4.2.3.3.2 Structures of Frames of RBC Entity Message
2.5.2.4.2.3.4 Specific Message Formats
Next, specific formats of various messages belonging to RBC entity message will be described.
2.5.2.4.2.3.4.1 Radio Bearer Setup Message
First, radio bearer setup message will be described. This message is sent from the network to a mobile station in order to setup a radio bearer therebetween.
2.5.2.4.2.3.4.2 Radio Bearer Release Message
This message is sent from the network to a mobile station or from a mobile station to the network in order to release a radio bearer therebetween.
2.5.2.4.2.3.4.3 Radio Bearer Release Complete Message
This message is sent from the network to a mobile station or from a mobile station to the network in order to notify of the release completion of a radio bearer therebetween.
2.5.2.4.2.3.4.4 Handover Command Message
This message is sent from the network to a mobile station in order to indicate the radio bearer therebetween that is added, deleted, replaced, or substituted at handover.
2.5.2.4.2.3.4.4 Handover Response Message
This message is sent to respond to a handover command massage, the handover command message initiating diversity handover (DHO) branch deletion, DHO branch addition, code replacement, and any combination thereof.
2.5.2.4.2.4 Format of RRC Entity Message
Next, RRC (radio resource control) entity message will be described.
2.5.2.4.2.4.1 Message Belonging to RRC Entity Message
2.5.2.4.2.4.2 RRC Entity Message Format
2.5.2.4.2.4.2.1 Mobility Facility Message
2.5.2.4.2.5 TAC Entity Messages
Next, TAC (terminal association control) entity messages will be described.
2.5.2.4.2.5.1 Terminal Association Setup Message
This message is sent from a mobile station to the network to indicate the start of the terminal association.
2.5.2.4.2.5.2 Terminal Association Connect Message
This message is sent from the network to the mobile station to respond to the terminal association setup message for notifying of the requested terminal association can be achieved normally.
2.5.2.4.2.5.3 Paging Response Message
This message is sent from a mobile station to the network to respond to paging.
2.5.2.4.2.5.4 Terminal Association Release Message
This message is sent from the network to the mobile station or from the mobile station to the network in order to request to release the terminal association therebetween.
2.5.2.4.2.5.5 Terminal Association Release Complete Message
This message is sent from the network to the mobile station or from the mobile station to the network in order to respond to the terminal association release message.
2.5.2.4.2.5.6 Page Authorized Message
This message is sent from the network to the mobile station to notify that the terminals have been associated.
2.5.2.4.2.6 Other Messages
In the following, other layer 3 messages which are carried on RACH, FACH, BCCH, and PCH will be described.
2.5.2.4.2.6.1 Signaling Channel Setup Request Message
This message is sent from a mobile station to a base transceiver system (BTS) in order to request to setup an SDCCH therebetween.
Signaling channel setup request messages from mobile stations which randomly access the BTS can be identified by PIDs (personal identifications) corresponding to the mobile stations. As described above, a PID is a random number originally determined by the corresponding mobile station and is included in a layer 1 frame.
2.5.2.4.2.6.2 Signaling Channel Setup Response Message
A signaling channel setup response message is sent from a BTS to a mobile station in order to setup an SDCCH therebetween.
A signaling channel setup failure message is sent from a BTS to a mobile station in order to notify of rejection of the request to setup an SDCCH therebetween.
2.5.2.4.2.6.3 Broadcast Information Messages
A first broadcast information message is sent from a BTS to mobile stations in order to notify of various information, e.g., control channel structure information, information regarding mobile station decision of visited zone, and restriction information.
A second broadcast information message is sent from a BTS to mobile stations in order to notify of call acceptance information.
2.5.2.4.2.6.4 Paging Message
This message is sent from a BTS to mobile stations in order to page to notify of a first calling a specific mobile station.
The paged MS ID in the list indicates the TMUI or IMUI of the paged mobile station. At the top of the paged MS ID field, an I/T bit is arranged for indicating that either of IMUI and TMUI is used.
The maximum length of the paging message is 112 bits. Coding manner of the paged MS ID asterisked in the list should be studied further. Even when IMUI is used for the paged MS ID, it is unnecessary to indicate all bits of IMUI by the paged MS ID since lower bits of the UMUI can be recognized from the PCHs calculation number.
2.5.2.4.3 Formats of Information Elements in Messages
Next, formats of information elements in the aforementioned messages will be described.
2.5.2.4.3.1 Formats of Information Elements in CC Entity Messages
2.5.2.4.3.1.1 Common Information Elements in CC Entity Messages
First, information elements which are common in CC entity messages will be described. Each of CC entity protocol messages may comprise:
(a) protocol discriminator,
(b) call reference,
(c) message type identifier, including a message compatibility instruction indicator, and
(d) variable length information elements if necessary. Information elements (a), (b), (c), and (d) are included in each of CC entity protocol messages commonly, as represented in
2.5.2.4.3.1.1.1 Protocol Discriminator
Protocol discriminator will be described next. The protocol discriminator is designed for distinguishing the CC entity message from other messages in the invented system. In addition, the protocol discriminator is used for distinguishing the message in the invented system from other messages prepared from OSI network layer protocol data unit encoded in compliance with other ITU-T recommendations, TTC standard or other standards.
The protocol discriminator is arranged at the top of each CC entity message as represented in
In the invented system, the CC entity messages does not use the same signaling virtual channel as that of another layer 3 protocol message. Therefore, the encoding manners of the protocol discriminator are different. However, if the other layer 3 protocol message is capsuled according to ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931, this message forms an exception.
The values in
2.5.2.4.3.1.1.2 Call Reference
Call reference is designed for identifying in a local user-network interface a message involved in a single call and is not used at the terminal devices interconnected via B-ISDN (broadband aspects of integrated services digital network). The call reference is arranged at the second part of each CC entity message and encoded in a manner represented in
As represented in
The call reference value is allocated to a call by the calling user side of a user-network interface. As a general rule, the sole call reference value is allocated to a call in a single signaling virtual channel by the calling user side. The call reference value is allocated at call onset and maintained to be used throughout the call. After termination of a call, the call reference value is released and may be allocated to another call.
It is possible that both sides of a signaling virtual channel link allocate the same call reference value to two calls, respectively, and the same call reference value is used for two calls in a single signaling virtual channel. In order to avoid such a coincidence by a wrong scenario, it is not desirable to reuse the released call reference value immediately after the release.
The call reference flag is restricted to have zero or one. The call reference flag identifies which side of the signaling virtual channel allocates the corresponding call reference. That is, with respect to messages from the calling user to the called user, the call reference flag is zero. With respect to messages from the called user to the calling user, the call reference flag is one. Therefore, although the same call reference value is simultaneously used for messages in two directions, they can be distinguished from each other.
The call reference flag is also similarly used for a global call reference, for example, at the initial setup procedure. As mentioned above, all bits of a global call reference value are zero (see
On the other hand, all bits of a dummy call reference value are one (see
2.5.2.4.3.1.2 Message Type Identifier
Next, message type identifier, including message compatibility instruction indicator, will be described.
The message type identifier is designed for identifying the function of the message transmitted. The message type identifier is arranged at the third part of each CC entity message and encoded in a manner represented in
On the other hand, the message compatibility instruction indicator is used by the message source terminal for explicitly instructing peer entity operation at the message destination terminal. The format and the coding manner of the message compatibility instruction indicator are represented in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3 Variable Length Information Elements According to FPLMTS
Next, variable length information elements according to FPLMTS will be described.
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.1 CODING
Coding of the variable length information elements of CC entity messages will be described hereinafter. The coding was studied in order that the device which processes messages can detect information elements necessary for the process and can ignore other elements.
As mentioned in
In the CC entity message, variable length information elements can be arranged in random order, hut the following constitutes exceptions.
(a) If the broadband repeat indicator information element is not included and the same kind of information elements is included, the same kind of information elements should be arranged in succession. However, this rule is not applied for broadband locking shift information elements and broadband non-locking shift information elements.
(b) If the broadband repeat indicator information element is included and the same kind of information elements is included, the following rules will be applied.
The broadband repeat indicator information element should be arranged directly before the first element among the same kind of information elements.
The first element among the same kind of information elements, which is arranged directly after the broadband repeat indicator information element, should be interpreted to have the highest priority. The same kinds of information elements should be interpreted in such a manner that the element of higher priority is arranged ahead.
The information elements arranged after the broadband non-locking shift information element should be processed as an information element in the application of the above-described rules.
Only one repetition of information element in the message with the broadband repetition indicator information element will not be considered an error. That is, the broadband repetition indictor should be ignored.
(c) If the broadband locking shift information element is used, the rule should be applied to all of the information elements after it. The order of the information elements is prescribed by codes indicated in the broadband locking shift information element.
(d) If the broadband non-locking shift information element is used, the broadband non-locking shift information element should be arranged directly before the information element which is subject of that.
If reserved bits are included in the description of the information used in the invented system, all of the reserved bits should be set to zero. Although the reserved bits of a received information element are not set to zero, the process for the reserved bits is not carried out.
Octets 3 and 4 of the information element cooperate to indicate the length of the information elements minus the total length of the information element identifier field, information element compatibility instruction indicator field, and information element length indicator field itself. For the information element length indicator, the number of octets in the information element is encoded into a binary code. The information element length indicator is of a fixed length of two octets. The coding manner of the information element length indicator should comply with the coding rule of integer described in this section.
The invented system permits an information element, of which the content is empty, to present. For example, it is possible that a setup message includes a called number information element of which the octet length is zero. In such cases, the receiving device treats in such a manner that the information element is not interpreted to be included. Similarly, the exclusion of an expected information element is interpreted as an “empty information element” at processing. The “empty information element” is the information element which has a (valid) information element identifier and is of a length of zero.
In addition, the following rules are applied to information element coding in the invented system.
(a) The variable length information element constitutes of a single octet or a group of octets. A number is allocated to each single octet or octet group for facilitating reference. The first number of the octet number indicates single octet or octet group.
(b) Each octet group is an independent unit in an information element. The format of octet group can be defined in the following fashion or other fashions.
(c) Octet groups are prepared by using any extension method. An extension method wherein bit eight is used as the extension bit, and an octet (N) will be extended to the next octets (Na, Nb, . . . ) is preferable. For example, a method based on the below rule can be utilized.
Bit value, zero, indicates that the corresponding bit is not end. Bit value, one, indicates that the corresponding bit is end. If an octet (e.g., Nb) exists, preceding octets (N) and (Na) also exist.
Bit eight may be indicated in the descriptions in sections 2.5.2.4.3.1.3.5, and so on.
“0/1 extension” is used when another octet will follow an octet and these octets belong to the same octet group.
“1 extension” is used when another octet will follow an octet and these octets belong to the same octet group.
“0 extension” is used when another octet will absolutely follow an octet and these octets belong to the same octet group.
When a specification is added, an additional octet can be defined after the preceding last octet (In this case, the description of “1 extension” is changed to the description of “0/1 extension.” Therefore, devices on the invented system should accept such an additional octet. However, it is unnecessary that each of the devices interprets the additional octet or functions in accordance that.
(d) In addition to the above-described extension method, the indication of bits eight to one of octet (N) can be extended to the next octets (N.1) and (N.2).
(e) The extension methods (c) and (d) can be associated. However, the extension method (c) is of high priority. Accordingly, all of octets (Na, Nb . . . ) must precede octets (N.1, N.2, . . . ). This rule should be applied to the case that octets (N.1, N.2, . . . ) are extended in accordance with the extension method for octets (Na, Nb, . . . ). The same rule should be applied to the case that the extension method (d) is repeated. That is, octets (N.1, N.2, N.2 . . . ) should precede octet (N.2).
(f) Optional octets are marked with asterisks.
(g) If an information element is assembled using subfield identifiers, these subfield identifiers are independent of position. In other words, it is unnecessary that they are aligned in a specific order.
However, it is impossible to repeat to use the extension method (c). That is, the extension method for octet 4a cannot be applied to the octet which should become octet 4b. In addition, a protocol designer should pay attention for guaranteeing that the resulting coding leads a sole interpretation although a plurality of extension methods are used. Furthermore, it is prescribed that the coding standard field is attached to all information elements. The information element of which the coding standard field is prescribed to “national standard” should be formatted in the same manner as the standard format of the invented system.
The following rules are applied to integer coding of ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931. When coding is not designated, the rules are applied.
(a) When an integer is encoded to the length equal to or more than two octets, the octet with a less octet number includes superior bits. Especially, the octet with the least octet number includes the MSB (most significant bit) while the octet with the greatest octet number includes the LSB (least significant bit).
(b) With reference to a field which is within an octet or constitutes a part of an octet, the following rules are applied.
A bit with a greater bit number constitutes a superior bit.
Especially, the bit with the greatest bit number indicates the MSB (most significant bit).
Especially, the bit with the least bit number indicates the LSB (least significant bit).
Bit coding is carried out from the bit with less bit number (from right). That is, preceding parts of zero appear at the side of greater bit number (left) in an octet or field.
(c) When integer values are expressed in fixed length octets, bit coding is carried out from the octet with greater octet number. That is, preceding zero parts appears at the side of less octet number.
(d) When integer values are expressed in variable length octets (e.g., when bit 8 is used as an extension bit), coding shall be performed so that it becomes the smallest number of octets. Octets, of which all the preceding bits are “0,” do not exist.
2.5.2.4.3.1.2 Extension of Code Sets
Next, extension of code sets will be described. When the format described at section 2.5.2.4.3.1.3.1 is used, the information element identifier may take a plurality values.
Each of information element identifiers may be extended to eight code sets. To facilitate to shift from a code set to another code set, a common information element identifier is used for these code sets. Based on the contents of the shift information element, the code set used for the next-coming information element group or information element can be identified. The code set used at an arbitrary given time is used as a “busy code set,” and code set 0 will be considered the initial busy code set” implicitly. In addition, in the invented system, two code set shift procedures: locking shift and non-locking shift procedures are applied.
Reservation status of code sets will be noted in the following.
Code sets 1 through 3 are reserved for future use of ITU-T or TTC.
Code set 4 is reserved for standard use of ISO or IEC.
Code set 5 is reserved for an information element group utilized domestically.
Code set 6 is reserved for an information element group specialized for the public or private network.
Code set 7 is reserved for an information element group specialized for users.
In addition, the coding rules prescribed in section 2.5.2.4.3.1.3.1 will be applied to information elements belonging to an arbitrary busy code set.
Shift from busy code set to another code set (by locking shift) is possible only when the value of new code set is higher than that of the former code set.
When using non-locking shift procedure, the information elements in code sets 4, 5, 6 and 7 may appear together with one in the busy code set, i.e., code set 0 (see section 2.5.2.4.3.1.3.4).
The user or network device should have the ability to recognize both locking and non-locking shift information elements and determine the length of information elements that follow them. The device, however, does not need to interpret or function according to the content of these information elements. This enables the equipment to decide the start point of following information elements.
Code set 7 shall be processed in the first switching equipment in the local network in accordance with the unrecognized information element processing procedure (see ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931) unless the service definition in the future, agreement by both parties, or readiness for special user support via the local network are provided.
Code set 6 is reserved for an information element group specialized for local networks (public or private networks). It is meaningless when messages are transmitted across the boundary between local networks and the boundary between national or international networks. Therefore, the information element in code set 6 shall be processed in accordance with the procedure for the information element which cannot be recognized by the first switching equipment after the message is transmitted across the boundary of the local network (see Section 5.6.8.1 of ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931) unless an agreement on two networks is concluded.
Code set 5 is reserved for an information element group utilized domestically. It is meaningless when messages are transmitted across the boundary between nations. Therefore, the information element in code set 5 shall be processed in accordance with the procedure for the information element which cannot be recognized by the first switching equipment after the message is transmitted across the boundary between nations (see Section 5.6.8.1 of ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931) unless an agreement on two networks is concluded.
Code set 4 is reserved for standard use of ISO or IEC.
Code sets 1 through 3 are reserved for future use of ITU-T or TTC.
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.3 Broadband Locking Shift Procedure
Next, broadband locking shift procedure will be described. In the broadband locking shift procedure, an information element is used to indicate a new busy code set. The indicated code set is continuously used until another broadband locking shift information element appears to indicate the use of another code set. For example, presume that code set 0 is “busy” at the start of analysis of message contents. When another broadband locking shift information element appears to indicate the use of code set 5, the information element identifier assigned by code set 5 shall be applied to the next and following information elements until another shift information element appears.
This procedure is used only for shifting from to a new code set of which the value is higher than the former code set, and relates to only messages including the broadband locking shift information elements. The initial busy code set at the start of analysis of message contents is code set 0.
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.4 Broadband Non-Locking Shift Procedure
Next, broadband non-locking shift procedure will be described.
The broadband non-locking shift procedure is used for temporarily shifting to a designated code set with lower or higher priority. In the broadband non-locking shift procedure, a broadband non-locking shift information element is used to indicate a busy code set which contributes for interpretation of the next single information element. After interpreting the next information element, the busy code set used before non-locking shift shall be used again for interpreting arbitrary following information elements. For example, assume that code set 0 is busy at the start of analysis of message contents. When a broadband non-locking shift information element appears to indicate the use of code set 6, the information element identifier assigned by code set 6 shall be applied only to the next information element. After interpreting it, code set 0 shall be applied again to interpret following information elements. The broadband non-locking shift information element shall not be interpreted as an error even if it indicates the current code set.
A broadband locking shift information element cannot be arranged directly after a broadband non-locking shift information element. The reception of the combination thereof should be interpreted as that only the broadband locking shift information element is received.
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.5 AAL Parameters
Next, AAL (ATM adaptation layer) parameters will be described. AAL parameters are not necessary for the invented system, but it is possible that they are necessary when the ATM will be applied on air interface in the future (this should be studied further).
AAL parameter information element is formulated to indicate AAL parameters which are requested for an AAL procedure element used for a call and which are significant from end to end. This includes all parameters for the AAL sub-layer which can be selected by users. The contents of this information element are transparent to the network except during interworking.
The AAL parameter information element should be coded as shown in
In
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.6 ATM Traffic Descriptor
Next, ATM traffic descriptor will be described. ATM traffic descriptor is not necessary for the invented system, but it is possible that this is necessary when the ATM will be applied on air interface in the future (this should be studied further). ATM traffic descriptor is formulated to indicate a traffic parameter set contributing to regulating the traffic control capability.
In the invented system, the value of ATM peek cell rate (TTC Standard JT-371), which is indicated by the ATM traffic descriptor, designates the user plane information rate and total amount of the end-to-end OAM (operation, administration, and maintenance) F5 flows generated by users. When the user attempts to use an end-to-end OAM F5 flow message, the peak cell rate in the direction reverse to unidirectional connection should not be indicated by zero. The peak cell rate is the number of cells per second and is represented with an integer in the 3 octets preceded by the sub-field.
The ATM traffic descriptor information element should be coded as shown in
The peak cell rate of cells of which the CLP (cell loss priority) equals to one is not represented in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.7 Broadband Bearer Capability
Next, broadband bearer capability will be described. Broadband bearer capability is not a necessary parameter for the invented system, but it is possible that this is necessary when the ATM will be applied on air interface in the future (this should be studied further).
The broadband bearer capability information element is formulated to indicate needed broadband connection-oriented-bearer service (see ITU-T Recommendation F.811), which are provided by the network. Therefore, the broadband bearer capability information element is included in messages used by the network. With reference to the use of the broadband bearer capability information element concerning confirming the communication possibility, refer to ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931.
The default for broadband bearer capability does not exist. Therefore, the broadband bearer capability information element can be processed by devices of the network and user. The broadband bearer capability information element should be coded as shown in
The octet marked with “Note” in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.8 Broadband High Layer Information (B-HLI)
Next, broadband high layer information will be described. Broadband high layer information element is formulated to provide means for checking communication capability of addressed entity (e.g., remote user and interworking unit addressed by a calling user, and a higher layer function node of network). The broadband high layer information element is carried transparently between a calling entity (e.g., calling user) and an addressed destination entity in B-ISDN.
The broadband high layer information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.9 Broadband Low Layer Information (B-LLI)
Broadband low layer information will be described next. Broadband low layer information element is formulated to provide means for checking communication capability of addressed entity (e.g., remote user and interworking unit addressed by a calling user, and a higher layer function node of network).
The broadband low layer information element is carried transparently between a calling entity (e.g., calling user) and an addressed destination entity in B-ISDN. The broadband low layer information element is also carried transparently from the addressed destination entity to the calling entity for negotiation of broadband low layer information (refer to ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931).
The broadband low layer information element should be coded as shown in
The octet marked with “Note 1” in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.11 Called Party NUMBER
Called Party number will be described next. Called party number information element is formulated to indicate the called party. The called party number information element should be coded as shown in
In
2.5.2.4.3.1.3NVM Called Party Sub-Address
Called party sub-address will be described. Called party sub-address element is formulated to indicate the sub-address of the called party. With reference to the definition of sub-address, refer to ITU-T Recommendation I.330. The called party sub-address information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.13 Calling Party Number
Calling party number will be described next. Calling party number information element is formulated to indicate the calling party. The calling party number information element should be coded as shown in
As marked with “Note 1” in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.14 Calling Party Sub-Address
Calling party sub-address will be described. Calling party sub-address element is formulated to indicate the sub-address of the calling party. With reference to the definition of sub-address, refer to ITU-T Recommendation 1-330. The calling party sub-address information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.15 CAUSE
The definition and use of cause information element are defined in ITU-T Recommendation Q.2610.
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.16 Connection Identifier
Connection identifier will be described next. Connection identifier is not necessary for the invented system, but it is possible that this is necessary when the ATM will be applied on air interface in the future (this should be studied further). Connection identifier information element is formulated to indicate a local ATM connection resource on the interface. This information element is included as an option in the setup message and is included as an option in the first response message to the setup message.
The connection identifier information element should be coded as shown in
If the change addition indicator field designates an “arbitrary VCI,” the VCI field in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.17 End-to-End Transit Delay
End-to-end transit delay will be described. End-to-end transit delay information element is formulated to indicate the substantial maximum end-to-end transit delay permitted in each call and to indicate the cumulative transit delay expected in the virtual connection. This transit delay is the uni-directional end-to-end transit delay of user data transferred during data transfer phase on the user plane between the calling user and the called user. It includes the total process time in the end user system and the cumulative transfer delay. The total process time in the end user system includes, e.g., process time, AAL handling delay, ATM cell assembly delay, and delay of all other processes. The network transfer delay includes, e.g., propagation delay, ATM layer transfer delay, and all other process delay in the network.
The cumulative transit delay value indicated in the SETUP message by the calling user (if any) indicates the transit delay from the calling user to the network boundary. The cumulative transit delay value, indicated by the network, in the setup message sent to the called user is the sum of the value indicated by the UNI connected with the calling party and transfer delay cumulated in the network. It does not include the transfer delay in the route between the network boundary to the called user. Each of the cumulative transit delay in connection messages on both UNIs is the total end-to-end transit delay expected for the user data transfer on the virtual channel connection offered to the corresponding call.
The maximum end-to-end transit delay can be used by the calling user to indicate the end-to-end delay request for the call. This field is contained in the setup message by the network and used for indicating that the calling user instructs the end-to-end delay request to the call. With reference to the applicable procedure, refer to ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931. The maximum end-to-end transit delay is not included in the connect message.
The end-to-end transit delay information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.18 QOS Parameter
Quality of service (QOS) parameter will be described next. In the invented system, QOS parameter information element is formulated in addition to the end-to-end transit delay information element. The QOS parameter information element is designed to indicate a QOS class.
QOS parameter information element is not supported in B-ISUP Release 1. Consequently, a network cannot transmit the QOS parameter information element, and therefore, generates a default value of the QOS parameter information element, which does not indicate QOS class, at the termination interface.
The QOS parameter information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.19 Broadband Repeat Indicator
Broadband repeat indicator will be described next. Broadband repeat indicator information element is formulated to indicate how to interpret a plurality of the same kind of information elements which are included in the same message. This is arranged before the first one of the same kind of information elements. However, even if the broadband repeat indicator is arranged before the information element solely included in a single message, this should not be interpreted as an error.
The broadband repeat indicator information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.20 Restart Indicator
Restart indicator will be described next. Restart indicator should be defined in detail in the future (this should be studied further). Restart indicator information element is formulated to identify a facility class which is initially designated.
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.21 Broadband Sending Complete
Broadband sending complete will be described next. Broadband sending complete information element is formulated to indicate the completion of the called party number as an option (see ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931). This information element is mandatory for the batch mode procedure. If this information element does not exist, however, the normal error process for “mandatory information element missing” does not need to be performed.
The broadband sending complete information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.22 Transit Network Selection
Transit network selection will be described next. Transit network selection information element is formulated to indicate a transit network being requested. A plurality of transit network selection information elements may be included in the same message for indicating the order of transit networks through which the call is transferred (see ITU-T Recommendation Q.2931).
The transit network selection information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.23 Notification Indicator
Notification indicator information element will be described next. Notification indicator information element is formulated to notify of information related to the call. The notification indicator information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.3.24 OAM Traffic Descriptor
OAM traffic descriptor will be described next. OAM traffic descriptor is not necessary for the invented system, but it is possible that this is necessary when the ATM will be applied on air interface in the future (this should be studied further). OAM traffic descriptor information element is formulated to provide information in relation to end-to-end OAM F5 information flow used to manage the performance on the user connection included in the call, and failure caused by the user.
The OAM traffic descriptor information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.4 Information Elements for Supporting 64 Kbps Circuit Switched Mode ISDN Service
Next, information elements for supporting 64 kbps circuit switched mode ISDN service will be described.
2.5.2.4.3.1.4.1 Coding Rules
First, coding rules of the information elements will be described. The information elements which will be described in section 2.5.2.4.3.1.4 are coded pursuant to the usual information element format represented in
2.5.2.4.3.1.4.2 Narrow-Band Bearer Capability
Narrow-band bearer capability will be described next. Narrow-band bearer capability is not necessary for the invented system, but it is possible that this is necessary when the ATM will be applied on air interface in the future (this should be studied further). Narrow-band bearer capability information element is formulated to indicate a request for narrow-band ISDN circuit switched mode bearer service provided by the network. This information element includes only the information which may be used by the network (see ITU-T Recommendation Q.931). The use method of narrow-band bearer capability information element related to the confirmation of communication feasibility is described in ITU-T Recommendation Q.931. The narrow-band bearer capability information element is transparently transferred in the broadband ISDN. The narrow-band bearer capability information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.4.3 Narrow-Band High Layer Compatibility
Narrow-band high layer compatibility information element is formulated to offer the procedure for the destination user to confirm the communication feasibility (see ITU-T Recommendation Q.931). The narrow-band high layer compatibility information element should be coded as shown in
However, the narrow-band high layer compatibility information element is transparently carried between the calling entity (e.g., calling user) and called entity (peer entity or higher later function node in the network) addressed by the calling entity in the broadband ISDN. When it was explicitly requested by the user upon subscription contract, the network with the tele-service feature may analyze this information to offer certain tele-service.
2.5.2.4.3.1.4.4 Narrow-Band Low Layer Compatibility
Narrow-band low layer compatibility will be described next. Narrow-band low layer compatibility information element is formulated to provide means for confirming the feasibility with the entity whose address was designated (e.g., remote user addressed by the calling user, interworking unit or higher layer function node of network).
The narrow-band low layer compatibility information element is carried transparently between the calling entity (e.g., calling user) and called entity addressed by the calling entity in the broadband ISDN. In addition, the narrow-band low layer compatibility information element is carried transparently from the called entity to the calling entity for the narrow-band low layer compatibility negotiation (ITU-T Recommendation Q.931).
The narrow-band low layer compatibility information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.1.4.5 Progress Indicator
Progress indicator will be described next. Progress indicator information element is formulated to indicate an event occurring during call generation. At most, two progress indicator elements are included in the same message.
The progress indicator information element should be coded as shown in
2.5.2.4.3.2 Formats of Information Elements in MM-T Entity Messages.
Next, formats of information elements in MM-T entity messages will be described. With reference to the list of MM-T specific information elements in
(1) TMUI
TMUI is a temporary number for identifying a mobile station and is updated at terminal location registration or updating. At call origination and termination, the TMUI is not updated unless the network recognizes the TMUI disaccord.
M-SCP identification number is used to identify the M-SCP which has assigned the TMUI and takes a value between zero and 999. Unique identification number is used to identify the mobile station in the node which has assigned the TMUI and takes a value between zero and 999999. The double assignment evasion bits are used for evading double assignment of the same TMUI and takes a value between zero and three.
(2) TMUI Assignment Source ID
TMUI Assignment Source ID will be described next. As represented in
(3) IMUI
IMUI will be described next with reference to
(4) Execution Authentication Type
Next, with reference to
(5) Authentication Random Pattern
Next, with reference to
(6) Authentication Ciphering Pattern
Next, with reference to
(7) Execution Ciphering Type
Next, with reference to
(8) TC Information
Next, with reference to
2.5.2.4.3.3 Information Elements of RBC Entity Messages
Information elements of RBC entity messages will be described next.
2.5.2.4.3.3.1 Message Type Identifier
As represented in
2.5.2.4.3.3.2 Information Element Identifier
Next, information element identifier will be described with reference to
2.5.2.4.3.3.3 Radio Bearer Setup Message Specific Parameter
2.5.2.4.3.3.4 Radio Bearer Release Message Specific Parameter
2.5.2.4.3.3.5 Radio Bearer Release Complete Message Specific Parameter
2.5.2.4.3.3.6 Handover Command Message Specific Parameter
2.5.2.4.3.3.7 Handover Response Message Specific Parameter
2.5.2.4.3.3.8 Radio Bearer Setup Information Element
“Uplink short code type” field indicates the information transfer rate for an uplink code (see
“Downlink short code type” field indicates the information transfer rate for a downlink code (see
“Frame offset group” field indicates which time slot in a single radio frame should be the front end of the logical frame when the mobile station communicates. This is formulated to uniformize traffic in a single frame time unit within the wired path. “Frame offset group” takes a value of 0-15 (see
“Slot offset group” field indicates an offset value of downlink transmission timing for a short code. The downlink transmission timing may be offset by, at most, three subslots in order to reduce redundancy of pilot symbols. The indication by the “slot offset group” field at the first call should be contained until the release of all calls of the mobile station (see
2.5.2.4.3.3.9 DHO Branch Addition Information Element
2.5.2.4.3.3.10 DHO Branch Deletion Information Element
2.5.2.4.3.3.11 ACCH Replacement Information Element
2.5.2.4.3.3.12 Branch Replacement Information Element
2.5.2.4.3.3.13 User Rate Replacement Information Element
2.5.2.4.3.3.14 Code Replacement Information Element
2.5.2.4.3.4 Information Elements of RRC Entity Messages
Next, information elements of RRC entity messages will be described.
2.5.2.4.3.4.1 Message Type Identifier
Message type identifier will be described with reference to
2.5.2.4.3.4.2 Facility Information Element
The format of facility information element is represented in
2.5.2.4.3.4.3 ROSE PDU
2.5.2.4.3.4.4 Specific Parameters for Operations
Next, specific parameters for defining operations will be described.
(a) Candidate Zone Information for Call Attempt or Acceptance
First, specific parameters of the candidate zone information for call attempt or acceptance will be described. This information is sent from the mobile station to the network to notify the network of the radio wave reception conditions, measured by the mobile station at the call attempt or acceptance, with respect to the visited sector and circumferential sectors.
(b) In-Use Zone Information
Next, specific parameters of the in-use zone information will be described. This information is sent from the mobile station to the network to initiate the downlink radio transmission power control based on the radio wave reception condition, measured by the mobile station, with respect to the in-use sector.
(c) Added Zone Information for DHO
Next, specific parameters of the added zone information for DHO will be described. This information is invoked by the mobile station to cause the network to add one or more diversity links during communication, and includes parameters on the candidate sector(s) to be added and radio reception conditions about the candidate sector and the in-use sector.
Only the candidate sector about which the radio reception condition is in excess of a threshold for DHO branch addition is added. However, if the condition about the candidate sector is worse than conditions of all in-use sectors when the number of the in-use sectors is the maximum, the DHO trigger indicating the added zone information for DHO is not sent.
(d) Deleted Zone Information for DHO
Next, specific parameters of the deleted zone information for DHO will be described. This information is invoked by the mobile station to cause the network to execute the diversity link deletion based on the radio reception condition about in-use sectors measured by the network.
The radio reception conditions about the in-use sectors are compared with a threshold for DHO branch deletion. Then, only the sector about which the radio reception condition is lower than the threshold for DHO branch deletion is deleted. On the contrary, this information is not sent for the sector which will be deleted instead of the sector added by the DHO branch addition although the radio reception condition is not lower than the threshold.
(e) HHO (Hard Handover) Zone Information
Next, specific parameters of the HHO zone information will be described. This information is invoked by the mobile station to cause the network to execute the branch replacement handover based on the radio reception conditions about the in-use sector and circumferential sectors measured by the network.
(f) Outer Loop Information
Next, specific parameters of the outer loop information will be described. This information is invoked by the mobile station to cause the network to execute outer loop transmission power control for the downlink radio channel.
(g) Quality Deterioration Notification Information
Next, specific parameters of the quality deterioration notification information will be described. This information is invoked by the mobile station to cause the network to execute the branch replacement wherein channel is replaced to another channel with a different frequency when the mobile station detects quality deterioration with respect to the downlink radio channel.
2.5.2.4.3.4.5 Definitions of Specific Parameters for Operations
Next, the definitions of the specific parameters for defining operations will be described.
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.1 Number of Visited Candidate Sectors, Number of in-use Visited Sectors, Number of Candidate Sectors to be Added at DHO, Number of Sectors to be Deleted at DHO, and Candidate Sectors for HHO
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.2 BTS Number
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.3 Sector Number
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.4 Perch Channel Reception SIR
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.5 Perch Channel Transmission Power
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.6 Long Code Phase Difference
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.7 Number of RBC IDs
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.8 RBC ID
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.9 Necessary SIR
2.5.2.4.3.4.5.10 FER Measurement
2.5.2.4.3.5 Formats of Information Elements of TAC (Terminal Association Control) Entity Messages
Next, formats of information elements of TAC entity messages will be described.
2.5.2.4.3.5.1 General Description of TAC (Terminal Association Control) Entity Messages
Each TAC entity message may comprise:
(a) protocol discriminator,
(b) message type identifier,
(c) message specific parameter (if necessary),
(d) fundamental information element (if necessary), and
(e) extensional information element (if necessary).
Although elements (a) and (b) are included in all of the TAC entity messages commonly, elements (c) through (d) may be included in specific messages on demand.
2.5.2.4.3.5.2 Protocol Discriminator
First, the protocol discriminator will be described. The protocol discriminator is formulated to distinguish the TAC entity message from other messages used in the invented system and from other OSI network layer protocol unit messages encoded in accordance with another ITU-T recommendation, TTC recommendation, and another recommendation. The protocol discriminator is located at the first part of each TAC entity message and encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.2.4.3.5.3 Message Type Identifier (Including Message Compatibility Instruction Indicator)
Next, the message type identifier will be described.
The message type identifier is formulated to identify the function of the TAC entity message. The message type identifier is located at the second part of each TAC entity message and encoded in the manner shown in
The message compatibility instruction indicator is valid only in the defined local interval. It is optional for the network to decide which value is set to the message compatibility instruction indicator of a message transmitted from the network to a user terminal insofar as the coding is not prescribed by another manner. In the invented system, it is encoded as “000.”
2.5.2.4.3.5.4 Message Specific Parameter
The message specific parameter is used for indicating specific information necessary for the message. This will be described in detail in the following.
2.5.2.4.3.5.4.1 TAC Entity Message Specific Parameters
(1) Terminal Association Setup Message Specific Parameter
The terminal association setup message specific parameter is encoded in the manner represented in
(2) Paging Response Message Specific Parameter
The paging response message specific parameter is encoded in the manner represented in
(3) Terminal Association Release Message Specific Parameter
The terminal association release message spec& parameter is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.2.4.3.5.4.2 Subfields of TAC Entity Message Specific Parameters
Next, subfields of TAC entity message specific parameters will be described.
(1) Coding Rules
First, coding rules of subfields of TAC entity message spec parameters will be described. The coding of the subfields should comply with the coding rule which will be described below. These rules are formulated in order that devices which treats the TAC entity messages can identify information elements that are necessary for procedures.
(a) When an integer is encoded to the length equal to or more than two octets, the octet with a less octet number includes superior bits. Especially, the octet with the least octet number includes the MSB (most significant bit) while the octet with the greatest octet number includes the LSB (least significant bit),
(b) With reference to a field which is within an octet or constitutes a part of an octet, the following rules are applied.
A bit with a greater bit number constitutes a superior bit.
Especially, the bit with the greatest bit number indicates the MSB (most significant bit).
Especially, the bit with the least bit number indicates the LSB (least significant bit).
Bit coding is carried out from the bit with less bit number (from right). That is, preceding parts of zero appear at the side of greater bit number (left) in an octet or field.
(c) When integer values are expressed in fixed length octets, bit coding is carried out from the octet with greater octet number. That is, preceding zero parts appears at the side of less octet number.
(d) When integer values are expressed in variable length octets, coding shall be performed so that it becomes the smallest number of octets. Octets, of which all the preceding bits are “0,” do not exist.
(2) Cause Information Element
The cause information element is used for indicating the cause of release of terminal association and is encoded in the manner represented in
(3) Mobile Station Type Information Element
The mobile station type information element is used for identifying the type of mobile station and is encoded in the manner represented in
(4) Paged MS ID Information Element
The paged MS ID information element is used for identifying the paged mobile station and is encoded in the manner represented in
(5) Paging ID Information Element
The paging ID information element is allocated to a call for managing the call when a mobile station is paged. It is encoded in the manner represented in
(6) TMUI Information Element
The TMUI information element is used for identifying respective mobile stations and is updated when the location is registered and when the location registration is updated. It is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.2.4.3.5.5 Extensional Information Element
Any extensional information elements for TAC entity messages are not used in the invented system and may be used for extension in the future. The extensional information elements for TAC entity messages may be encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.2.4.3.6 Others
In the following, other layer 3 messages which are carried on RACH, FACH, BCCH, and PCH will be described.
2.5.2.4.3.6.1 Message Type
2.5.2.4.3.6.2 Length
2.5.2.4.3.6.3 PERCH Channel Reception SIR
2.5.2.4.3.6.4 Short Code Number
2.5.2.4.3.6.5 Frame Offset Group
2.5.2.4.3.6.6 Slot Offset Group
2.5.2.4.3.6.7 Network Number
2.5.2.4.3.6.8 Network Version
2.5.2.4.3.6.9 Mobile Station Common Parameter Version
2.5.2.4.3.6.10 BTS Number
2.5.2.4.3.6.11 Sector Number
2.5.2.4.3.6.12 Number of Overlapped Registration Areas
2.5.2.4.3.6.13 Area Number
2.5.2.4.3.6.14 Area Registration Timer
2.5.2.4.3.6.15 Calibrated Power Level Necessary for Reception at Base Station
2.5.2.4.3.6.16 Uplink Long Code Number
This should be studied further. The uplink long code number information element will indicate the uplink long code number on the RACH and SDCCH in the future.
2.5.2.4.3.6.17 Number of PERCH Channel LCS for Determination of Visited Zone
2.5.2.4.3.6.18 PERCH Channel LC Number
The perch channel LC number will be used in the future. This should be studied further.
2.5.2.4.3.6.19 Number of Frequency Bands Used by Base Station
2.5.2.4.3.6.20 Frequency Band
2.5.2.4.3.6.21 Restricted Information
This information element will be used in the future for indicating information on access restriction because of construction, of malfunction or of other reasons. This should be studied further.
2.5.2.4.3.6.22 Call Acceptance Information
The call acceptance information element will be used in the future for indicating to the mobile station whether a new call can be accepted or not. This should be studied further.
2.5.2.4.3.6.23 Control Channel Format Information
The control channel format information element will be used in the future for indicating the number of PCHs, the number of RACHs for the long code, the number of RACHs for the short code, the number of FACHs for the long code, the number of FACHs for the short code, the code numbers used, and the slot positions. The control channel format information element may include information for packets. This should be studied further.
2.5.2.4.3.6.24 BCCH Reception Duration
2.5.2.4.3.6.25 Number of Paged Mobile Stations
2.5.2.4.3.6.26 Paged MS ID
2.5.2.4.3.6.27 Paging ID
2.5.2.4.3.6.28 Extensional Information Element
Other extensional information elements will be decided in the future.
2.5.3 Specifications of BTS-MCC Interface
Next, the specifications of the BTS-MCC interface will be described.
2.5.3.1 Outline
First, an outline will be described. In section 2.5.3, protocols of layers 1 through 3 at the BTS-MCC interface will be described.
2.5.3.2 Layer 1
Layer 1 is formulated for BS transmission line interfaces and for BSC transmission line interfaces. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.
2.5.3.3 ATM Layer
Similarly, ATM layer is formulated for BS transmission line interfaces and for BSC transmission line interfaces. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.
2.5.3.4 AAL Common Part Sublayer
Similarly, AAL common part sublayer is formulated for BS transmission line interfaces and for BSC transmission line interfaces. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.
2.5.3.5 AAL Service Specific Sublayer
Similarly, AAL service specific sublayer is formulated for BS transmission line interfaces and for BSC transmission line interfaces. Therefore, description thereof is omitted.
2.5.3.6 Layer 3
In the following, layer 3 will be described.
2.5.3.6.1 Protocol Architecture
Layer 3 protocol architecture in the BTS-MCC interface will be described. In addition, layer 3 protocol control entities will be described. Procedures executed in the BTS-MCC interface are as follows:
(1) BTS-MCC Link Control Procedures
Link establishment and release procedures for the SDCCH between SCMF and TACF and between SCMF and SACF.
Access link establishment between TACF and BCFr.
(2) Paging Procedure
Paging instruction from TACF to BTS.
(3) Radio Wave Status Management Procedure
Status measurement of radio channels between RFTR and RRC (However, this procedure is not used in the invented system).
(4) Other Procedures Such as Transferring Information to BTS
In accordance with the aforementioned procedures, the following layer 3 protocol control entities are used in the invented system.
(a) BC (Bearer Control)
This entity prepares and transfers messages for controlling the link between TACF and BCFr. That is, it carries out one of procedures (1) mentioned above.
(b) BSM (Base Station Management)
This entity prepares and transfers a message for instructing to page the BTS and any other messages for managing the BTS. That is, it carries out procedures (2) and (4).
(c) RCM (Radio Condition Management)
This entity prepares and transfers a message for measuring conditions of radio resources, but is not used in the invented system.
Next, the protocol architecture in the interface will be described. Messages from the data link layer are identified by the protocol discriminators, link references, and transaction IDS, on the link for control signals at the BTS-MCC interface, and then distributed to destination protocol control entities.
2.5.3.6.2 Message Formats
Next, formats of messages transferred on the BTS-MCC interface will be described.
2.5.3.6.2.1 BC Entity Messages
First, BC entity messages will be described.
2.5.3.6.2.1.1 Types of BC Entity Messages
2.5.3.6.2.1.2 Classification of Types of BC Entity Messages
BC entity messages in the invented system can be classified into two groups:
one group includes messages for establishing and releasing links according to AAL type 2 for the TCHs or SDCCHs. An request for establishing and releasing links according to AAL type 2 for the ACCH and a request for controlling radio channels within the BTS may be included as information elements in one of these messages.
the other includes messages not relevant to state transition of BC protocol entity. If the above request for the ACCH or for controlling radio channels within the BTS do not accompany with control of links according to AAL type 2 for TCHs or SDCCHs, a message not relevant to state transition of BC protocol entity is prepared including the request as an information element and is transported.
2.5.3.6.2.1.3 Message Format
Each message comprises common parts and one or more optional fundamental information elements as represented in
2.5.3.6.2.1.3.1 Link Setup Requested Message
The link setup requested message will be described. This message is sent from the BTS to the MSCNW (more specifically, BSC function) to select a short cell connection corresponding to resources, such as a short code and a radio facility after the selection of such resources by the BTS while the SDCCH is started to be established.
2.5.3.6.2.1.3.2 Link Setup Message
The link setup message will be described. This message is sent from the MSCNW (BSC function) to the BTS when the MSCNW (BSC function) has completed to select a short cell connection only at the establishment of a TCH. This message is also sent from the MSCNW (BSC function) to the BTS to activate a radio bearer.
2.5.3.6.2.1.3.3 Link Setup Proceeding Message
The link setup proceeding message will be described. This message is sent from the BTS to the MSCNW (BSC function) to notify of the selection results of radio resources and activation results of radio facilities at the first call, the second call, and the hard handover.
2.5.3.6.2.1.3.4 Link Setup Response Message
The link setup response message will be described. This message is sent from the BTS to the MSCNW (BSC function) to notify of the completion of the establishment of radio bearer for the first radio branch at the first call, the second call, and the hard handover. This message is also sent from the BTS to the MSCNW (BSC function) to notify of the selection results of radio resources and activation results of radio facilities at the second call and the hard handover. This message is also sent from the BTS to the MSCNW (BSC function) to notify of the synchronization instruction results at the base station when the SDCCH is established.
2.5.3.6.2.1.3.5 Link Facility Message
The link facility message will be described. This message is sent from the MSCNW (BSC function) to the BTS in order to initiate to add and delete radio resources and radio facilities when intra-cell HOSHO is carried out, and in order to initiate the ACCH replacement.
2.5.3.6.2.1.3.6 Link Facility Message
The link facility message will be described. This link facility message is different from that described at section 2.5.3.6.2.1.3.5. This message is sent from the BTS to the MSCNW (BSC function) in order to notify of the result of the initiation to add and delete radio resources and radio facilities when intra-cell HOSHO is carried out, and in order to notify of the result of the initiation of the ACCH replacement and 20 the squelch.
2.5.3.6.2.1.3.7 Link Release Message
The link release message will be described. This message is sent from the MSCNW (BSC function) to the BTS to release a radio bearer.
2.5.3.6.2.1.3.8 Link Release Complete Message
The link release complete message will be described. This message is sent from the BTS or the MSCNW (BSC function) in order to indicate that the message transmitting device has released the link reference and the connection identifier. The device which receives the message should release the link reference.
If this message is the first link reference release message, the cause indication information element is mandatory. This information element is also included in the message if this message is sent as a result of the error process condition.
To supplement the above description,
2.5.3.6.2.2 Format of BSM Entity Message
Next, formats of BSM entity messages will be described. Each BSM entity message may comprise a protocol discriminator, message type identifier, and one or more fundamental information elements as represented in
2.5.3.6.2.2.1 Paging Message
The paging message will be described. This message is sent from the MSCNW (BSC function) to the BTS in order to page a mobile station for notifying that it is called.
The area number information element of the paging message is mandatory when the BTS manages a plurality of area numbers for paging in a plurality of paging areas for multiple area registration. The IMUI or TMUI is used as the paged MS ID.
2.5.3.6.2.3 Detailed Descrietion of Information Elements
Next, the information elements will be described in detail.
2.5.3.6.2.3.1 Information Elements of BC Entity Messages
Information elements of BC entity messages will be described.
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1 Pattern of Each Fundamental Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.1 Link ID Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.2 TCH Setup Request Information Element Without Frequency Indication (Call Initiated)
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.3 TCH Setup Request Information Element Without Frequency Indication (Active)
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.4 TCH Setup Request Information Element with Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.5 DHO Branch Addition Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.6 Intra-BS DHO Branch Addition Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.7 ACCH Setup Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.8 TCH Setup Acceptance Information Element Without Frequency Indication (Call Initiated)
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.9 TCH Setup Acceptance Information Element Without Frequency Indication (Active)
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.10 TCH Setup Acceptance Information Element with Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.11 TCH Setup Response Information Element Without Frequency Indication (Call Initiated)
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.12 TCH Setup Response Information Element Without Frequency Indication (Active)
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.13 TCH Setup Response Information Element with Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.14 DHO Branch Addition Response Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.15 Intra-BS DHO Branch Addition Response Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.16 ACCH Setup Response Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.17 Intra-BS DHO Branch Addition Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.18 Intra-BS DHO Branch Deletion Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.19 Intra-BS HHO Initiation Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.20 ACCH Release Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.21 Frequency Replacement Request Information Element Without Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.22 Frequency Replacement Request Information Element with Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.23 Setup Completion Notification Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.24 Intra-BS HHO Branch Deletion Response Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.25 Intra-BS HHO Branch Addition Response Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.26 ACCH Release Response Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.27 Frequency Replacement Setup Response Information Element with Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.28 Frequency Replacement Setup Request Information Element with Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.29 Frequency Replacement Acceptance Information Element Without Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.30 Frequency Replacement Response Information Element Without Frequency Indication
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.31 Code Replacement Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.32 TCH Release Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.33 SDCCH Release Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.34 Cause Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.35 SDCCH Setup Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.1.36 LAI Setup Request Information Element
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2 Definitions of Information Elements of BC Entity Messages
Next, definitions of information elements of BC entity messages will be described.
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.1 Protocol Discriminator
First, the protocol discriminator will be described. The protocol discriminator is formulated to distinguish the BC entity message from other messages used in the invented system and from other OSI network layer protocol unit messages encoded in accordance with another ITU-T recommendation, TTC recommendation, and another recommendation. The protocol discriminator is located at the first part of each BC entity message and encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.2 Message Type Identifier
Next, the message type identifier will be described. The message type identifier is formulated to identify the function of the BC entity message. The message type identifier is located at the second part of each BC entity message and encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.3 Link Reference
Next, the link reference will be described. The link reference is formulated to identify each instance of the BC protocol entity generated for AAL type 2/type 5 link for the TCH or SDCCH. The link reference is encoded in the manner shown in
In
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.4 Information Element Identifier
Next, the information element identifier will be described. The information element identifier is formulated to identify an optional information element included in the BC entity message. The information element identifier is encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.5 Length of Information Element
Next, the “length of information element” will be described. The length of information element is formulated to indicate the whole length of all of parameters in the fundamental information element. The length of information element is encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.6 AAL Type and Link Identifier
The “AAL type” indicates the AAL type and is encoded in the manner shown in
An example of encoded link identifier is represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.7 Transmission Quality
Next, the “transmission quality” will be described. The transmission quality indicates the quality of ATM link and is encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.8 Forward (Downlink) Transmission Rate
Next, the “forward or downlink transmission rate” will be described. The forward transmission rate indicates the forward information transmission rate. In the invented system, the forward transmission rate is selected from the group consisting of 8 kbps, 12.8 kbps, 32 kbps, 34.4 kbps, 64 kbps, 76.8 kbps, 128 kbps, 162.4 kbps, and 384 kbps.
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.9 Reverse (Uplink) Transmission Rate
Next, the “reverse or uplink transmission rate” will be described. The reverse transmission rate indicates the reverse information transmission rate. In the invented system, the reverse transmission rate is selected from the group consisting of 8 kbps, 12.8 kbps, 32 kbps, 34.4 kbps, 64 kbps, 76.8 kbps, 128 kbps, 162.4 kbps, and 384 kbps.
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.10 Sector Number
Next, the “sector number” will be described. The sector number is a value of 1-12 for identifying the corresponding sector in the BTS and is encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.11 Bearer Capability
Next, the “bearer capability” will be described. The bearer capability is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.12 Frequency Selection Info
Next, the “frequency selection information” will be described. The frequency selection information is an information element of 0-255 indicating frequency bands which may be employed by the mobile station and is sent from the mobile communications switching center to the base station when the base station should select the communication frequency. Upon reception of the frequency selection information, the base station selects the most appropriate frequency band which may be employed by the base station and mobile station. The frequency selection information is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.13 Frequency
Next, the “frequency” will be described. The frequency information element indicates the frequency band selected by the base station. Simultaneous link connections for the same mobile station may use the same frequency band. The frequency information element which indicates one of f1 to f256 is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.14 Frame Offset Group
Next, the “frame offset group” will be described. The frame offset group indicates which time slot in a single radio frame should be the front end of the logical frame when the mobile station communicates. This is formulated to uniformize in a single frame time unit within the wired path. “Frame offset group” takes a value of 0-15 and is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.15 Slot Offset Group
Next, the “slot offset group” will be described. The slot offset group indicates an offset value of downlink transmission timing for a short code. The downlink transmission timing may be offset by, at most, 15 subslots in order to reduce redundancy of pilot symbols. The offset value is acquired at the BTS when the first call occurs, is stored by the BSC function of the network, and is included in the slot offset group information element. The indication by the slot offset group at the first call should be contained until the release of all calls of the mobile station. The slot offset group is encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.16 Long Code Phase Difference
Next, the “long code phase difference” will be described. The long code phase difference indicates the difference between the long code phase calculated by a long code counter (SFN) for the visited perch channel or the uplink long code phase of the in-use sector and the long code phase calculated by a long code counter (SFN) for the perch of the surrounding sector (handover destination sector) represented in chip time. This is used when the execution of DHO and the zone selection at call attempt or acceptance. The long code phase is measured by the mobile station, and reported to the BSC of the network. The long code difference should be within the range between zero and 2-1 chip time and be encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.17 Reverse Long Code Number
Next, the “reverse or uplink long code number” will be described. The in-use reverse long code number is a specific information to the mobile station. The information can be utilized continuously although the frequency band has been updated. The reverse long code number is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.18 Reverse Short Code Type
Next, the “reverse or uplink short code type” will be described. The reverse short code type is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.19 Number of Reverse Short Codes
Next, the “number of reverse or uplink short codes” will be described. The number of reverse short codes indicates the number of reverse short codes when a plurality of reverse short codes are used for a reverse channel of one connection. The number of reverse short codes is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.20 Reverse Short Code Number
Next, the “reverse or uplink short code number” will be described. The reverse short code number is a value of 0-1023 for identifying the employed reverse short code. This is a unique number for distinguishing the corresponding short code from others which are used for the same mobile station although a single long code is used for the mobile station. At the first reverse short code number field, the short code number for the ACCH is contained. When VPCI, VCI, and UCI for ACCH has been designated simultaneously, the BTS recognizes that the ACCH is necessary to be established. The reverse short code number is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.21 Forward Short Code Type
Next, the “forward or downlink short code type will be described. The forward short code type is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.22 Number of Forward Short Codes
Next, the “number of forward or downlink short codes” will be described. The number of forward short codes indicates the number of forward short codes when a plurality of forward short codes are used for a forward channel of one connection. The number of forward short codes is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.23 AAL Type and Link Identifier for ACCH
The “AAL type” for the ACCH indicates the AAL type. It is always encoded as “0010” for indicating AAL type 2 and is encoded in the manner shown in
An example of encoded link identifier for the ACCH is represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.24 Transmission Quality for ACCH
Next, the “transmission quality” for the ACCH will be described. The transmission quality indicates the quality of ATM link and is encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.25 Forward Transmission Rate for ACCH
Next, the “forward or downlink transmission rate” for the ACCH will be described. The forward transmission rate indicates the forward information transmission rate which is restricted by the code used for the TCH. In the invented system, the forward transmission rate is selected from the group consisting of 8 kbps, 12.8 kbps, 32 kbps, 34.4 kbps, 64 kbps, 76.8 kbps, 128 kbps, 162.4 kbps, and 384 kbps.
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.26 Reverse Transmission Rate for ACCH
Next, the “reverse or uplink transmission rate” for the ACCH will be described. The reverse transmission rate indicates the reverse information transmission rate. In the invented system, the reverse transmission rate is selected from the group consisting of 8 kbps, 12.8 kbps, 32 kbps, 34.4 kbps, 64 kbps, 76.8 kbps, 128 kbps, 162.4 kbps, and 384 kbps.
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.27 Forward Short Code Number
Next, the “forward or downlink short code number” will be described. The forward short code number is a value of 0-1023 for identifying the employed forward short code. This is a unique number for distinguishing the corresponding short code from others which are used for the same mobile station although a single long code is used for the mobile station. The forward short code number is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.28 Result
The “result” is formulated for indicating the result, i.e., OK or NG and is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.29 Cause
Next, the “cause” will be described. When the link release complete message is the first link reference release message, this information element is mandatory. If the link release complete message is transmitted as a result of an error treatment condition, this information element is included. The cause is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.30 Initial Transmission Power
Next, the “initial transmission power” will be described. The initial transmission power indicates the downlink transmission power and is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.2.3.1.2.32 Location Identity
Next, the “location identity” will be described. The location identity is utilized for identifying the location registration area where the mobile station visits. This takes a value between zero and 255 and is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.3.2 Formats of Information Elements of BSM Entity Messages
Next, the formats of information elements of BSM entity messages will be described.
2.5.3.6.3.2.1 Protocol Discriminator
First, the protocol discriminator will be described. The protocol discriminator is formulated to distinguish the BSM entity message from other messages used in the invented system and from other OSI network layer protocol unit messages encoded in accordance with another ITU-T recommendation, TTC recommendation, and another recommendation. The protocol discriminator is located at the first part of each BSM entity message and encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.3.2.2 Message Type Identifier
Next, the message type identifier will be described. The message type identifier is formulated to identify the function of the BC entity message. The message type identifier is located at the second part of each BC entity message and encoded in the manner shown in
2.5.3.6.3.2.3 PCHs Calculation Information
Next, the “PCHs calculation information” will be described. The “PCHs Calculation Information” is an information element for the BTS to select the perch channel. This information element is, for example, represented at inferior 16 bits of the binary encoded IMUI. That is, the PCHs calculation information can be recognized by a part of the IMUI of each mobile station. This is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.3.2.4 Area Number
Next, the “area number” will be described. The area number is utilized for identifying the location registration area where the mobile station visits. This takes a value between zero and 255 and is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.3.2.5 Paged MS ID
Next, the “paged MS ID” will be described. The paged MS ID is the TMUI or IMUI for paging the subject mobile station. If the IMUI is used as the paged MS ID, the integer IMUI transformed from the IMUI coded with BCD. The paged MS ID is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.3.2.5.1 Number Type
The “number type” indicates the type of number which is included at octet 4 and later octets in the paged MS ID. The number type is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.3.2.5.2 Number Length
The “number length” indicates the length, represented in octets, of number which is included at octet 4 and later octets in the paged MS ID. The number length is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.3.2.5.3 TMUI
Next, the “TMUI information element” will be described. The TMUI is used for identifying the mobile station. The TMUI is updated whenever the area registration or updating thereof is carried out. This is dynamically allotted to the mobile station. The length of the TMUI information element is fixed to four octets.
2.5.3.6.3.2.5.4 Integer IMUI
Next, the “integer IMUI” will be described. The integer IMUI is used for identifying the mobile station. The IMUI is used in the second paging when the network has recognized that the TMUI stored in the mobile station replying to the fist paging with TMUI is wrong. The integer IMUI is transformed from the IMUI coded with BCD, and has a variable length, at most, seven octets.
2.5.3.6.3.2.5.4 Paging ID
Next, the “paging ID” will be described. The paging ID is used for managing the paging call when paging the mobile station. The paging ID is temporally allotted when paging. The paging ID information element is encoded in the manner represented in
2.5.3.6.4.1 SDL Diagrams for BC
To supplement the above description, various SDL diagrams for bearer control are represented in
2.5.3.6.4.2 SDL Diagram for BSM
In addition,
3 Control Procedures Uniquely Carried Out by the Invented System
The invented system can carry out unique control procedures which cannot be achieved by prior arts since it uses the above-described structures and protocol specifications. Such unique control procedures will be described hereinafter.
3.1 Ciphering Onset Moment Notification
3.1.1 Background of Invention of the Procedure
As described above, if the ciphering onset moment is not recognized, the destination device cannot decipher the ciphered signal (control signal) although it has received the ciphered signal. That is, if the onset time of the decipherment may be misestimated, the meaning of signals cannot be made out.
In a solution of the above-described problem, it is possible that after the transmission of an enciphering onset request from the network to the mobile station, the network and the mobile station commence to encipher transmitted signals and to decipher received signals.
This solution method will be described in more detail with reference to
As represented in
Upon reception of the enciphering onset request, the mobile station also commences to encipher transmitted signals and to decipher received signals at step S23. Thereafter, the network and the mobile station encipher transmitted signals and decipher received signals.
However, in the above-described prior art ciphering procedure sequence, there is likelihood of failure of decipher because of the difference between the time when the source device commences to encipher the transmitted signal and the time when the destination device commences to decipher the received signal.
For example, as represented in
It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a control method for a mobile station, network, and mobile communication system to read received signals with the least amount of failure by means of the ciphering onset at the source simultaneously with the deciphering onset at the destination.
3.1.2 Outline of the Ciphering Onset Moment Notification of Embodiment
The outline of ciphering onset moment notification according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described.
As represented in
Upon reception of the enciphering onset request, the mobile station commences to decipher received signals at step S33. Thereafter, the network enciphers transmitted signals while the mobile station deciphers received signals.
Furthermore, the mobile station sends the network the enciphering onset response for acknowledging the enciphering onset request at step S34. After the notification of the enciphering onset response, the mobile station commences to encipher transmitted signals (uplink or reverse signals) at step S35.
Upon reception of the enciphering onset response, the network commences to decipher received signals at step S36.
Accordingly, the mobile station does not commence deciphering the received signal until it receives the ciphering onset request. Similarly, the network does not commence deciphering the received signal until it receives the ciphering onset response. Therefore, the destination device can read received signals with the least amount of failure by means of the ciphering onset at the source simultaneously with the deciphering onset at the destination.
For example, as represented in
3.1.3 Detailed Description of the Ciphering Onset Moment Notification of Embodiment
The ciphering onset moment notification of embodiment will be further described in more detail. With reference to the functional model in
The network on the other hand includes functional entities called SACF, TACF, LRCF, and LRDF. SACF is connected with MCF to function as an interface with the mobile terminal for realizing services that are not related to calls. TACF is connected with TACAF to control the access processes to the mobile station terminal, e.g., the origination, paging, and so on. LRCF is connected with TACF and SACF to control mobility management. LRDF stores various data on mobility management.
With such a structure, prior to the mutual notification of the encipherment onset, a user authentication procedure (refer to section 2.4.5.1) is executed as shown in
Then, mutual notification of the encipherment onset time is carried out in accordance with the sequence shown in
Next, TACAF and MCF of the mobile terminal send a START CIPHERING response confirmation to TACF and SACF of the network, this confirmation indicating that mobile station will next start to transmit enciphered signals. Consequently, the network entities can recognize that the succeeding signals transmitted from the mobile terminal will be ciphered. After the transmission of the START CIPHERING response confirmation, TACAF and MCF of the mobile terminal cipher succeeding signals according to a preselected encipherment procedure using a preselected ciphering key. Once the terminal entities receive the enciphered signal, TACF and SCF decipher the received signals. Accordingly, the uplink signal transmitted from the mobile terminal can be transported in secret and interpreted by only the network.
Therefore, although the network does not have the function to recognize both of enciphered and non-ciphered signals at the same mode for system simplification, communications can be achieved between the mobile station and the network smoothly with the least amount of failure by means of the ciphering onset at the source simultaneously with the deciphering onset at the destination.
3.2 Selection of Encipherment Manner by Negotiation Between Mobile Station and Network
3.2.1 Background of Invention of the Procedure
In this system, if the user of the mobile station would like to select a level of security, it is impossible to select a suitable encipherment procedure or a suitable encipherment key preparation procedure.
In addition, it is impossible for the mobile station or the network to select a suitable encipherment procedure or a suitable encipherment key preparation procedure for multimedia service, such as transmission of voice or motion pictures although the communications system permits to transmit them.
Furthermore, if it is necessary to improve encipherment in view of function extension, such as a new service, of the mobile communications system in the future, it will be difficult to adopt a new suitable encipherment procedure or a new suitable encipherment key preparation procedure.
Furthermore, it is necessary that various mobile communications networks utilize all of the encipherment procedures in common in order that mobile stations roam across service areas of mobile communications networks.
It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a control method for a mobile station, network, and mobile communication system to deal flexibly various encipherment procedures and encipherment key preparation procedures. A preferable embodiment will be described next with reference to
3.2.2 Outline of Selection of the Encipherment Manner by Negotiation Between Mobile Station and Network in Accordance with Embodiment
In view of the notification from the mobile station, the network selects a type of encipherment manner at step S52. For example, a type of encipherment procedure A is selected in
The mobile station then adapts the inside functions according to the type of encipherment manner (encipherment procedure A in
Accordingly, the mobile station and network are allowed to communicate with each other at step S56 in such a fashion that they use the selected encipherment manner (e.g., encipherment procedure A in
In addition, it is possible for the mobile station or the network to select a suitable encipherment procedure or a suitable encipherment key preparation procedure for multimedia service, such as transmission of voice or motion pictures if the communications system permits to transmit them.
Furthermore, if it is necessary to improve encipherment in view of function extension, such as a new service, of the mobile communications system in the future, it will be easy to adopt a new suitable encipherment procedure or a new suitable encipherment key preparation procedure.
Furthermore, if a plurality of mobile communications networks utilize minimal encipherment manners in common, it is possible to communicate under a suitable encipherment manner when mobile stations roam across service areas of mobile communications networks. It is unnecessary that various mobile communications networks utilize all of the encipherment procedures in common: each communications network can execute other unique encipherment procedures.
3.2.3 Detailed Description of the Selection of Encipherment Manner by Negotiation Between Mobile Station and Network in Embodiment
The selection of encipherment manner by negotiation between mobile station and network in accordance with an embodiment will be further described in more detail with reference to the sequential diagram constituted of
A security control unit of the mobile station decides an order of priorities of the types of the encipherment procedures which can be executed by the mobile station and an order of priorities of the types of the encipherment key procedures which can be executed by the mobile station at step S61 before encipherment communication. The security control unit of the mobile station sends a security control unit of the network a call setup request at step S62. The call setup request includes information on the types of encipherment procedures A, B, and C which can be executed by the mobile station; the types of encipherment key preparation procedures X, Y, and Z which can be executed by the mobile station; and the priority order. Upon the reception, the security control unit of the network stores the information on the types of encipherment procedures A, B, and C at step S63.
Next, the security control unit of the network notifies a user information control unit of the network of the information on the types of encipherment key preparation procedures X, Y, and Z at step S64. Upon the reception, the user information control unit prepares a random number at step S65. Furthermore, the user information control unit selects an encipherment key preparation procedure from the key preparation procedures X, Y, and Z at step S66.
Then, the user information control unit prepares an encipherment key at step S67 in accordance with the random number prepared at step S65 and the type of encipherment key preparation procedure (e.g., X as in
Then, the security control unit of the network stores the prepared encipherment key at step S69, and transmits an authentication request indicating the prepared random number and the selected type of encipherment key preparation procedure (e.g., X as in
Upon the reception of the authentication request, the security control unit of the mobile station sends an authentication calculation request indicating the random number and the type of encipherment key preparation procedure (e.g., X as in
Upon the reception of the authentication calculation request, the user information control unit of the mobile station prepares another encipherment key at step S72 in accordance with the random number and the type of encipherment key preparation procedure (e.g., X as in
Then, the security control unit of the mobile station stores the encipherment key prepared at the user information control unit of the mobile station at step S75. In addition, the security control unit notifies at step S76 the security control unit in the network of an authentication response including the authentication calculation result obtained by a calculation at the user information control unit.
Upon the reception of the authentication response, the security control unit of the network sends the user information control unit of the network at step S77 an authentication calculation comparison request indicating the authentication calculation result sent from the mobile station. The user information control unit, then, compares the authentication calculation result with another authentication calculation result prepared at the network in accordance with the encipherment key prepared at step S67 and other parameters for authentication (not illustrated).
After the completion of the authentication, the user information control unit of the network can send an encipherment request to the security control unit of the network at step S78.
Upon the reception of the encipherment request, the security control unit of the network transmits at step S79 another encipherment request indicating the encipherment key stored at step S69 and the types of encipherment procedures A, B, and C stored at step S63 to a radio access control unit of the network.
Then, the radio access control unit of the network selects an encipherment procedure from the procedures A B, and C at step S80. For example, the type of procedure B is selected in
Upon the reception of the encipherment request, the radio access control unit of the mobile station stores the indicated type of encipherment procedure (B) at step S82. In addition, the radio access control unit of the mobile station requests at step S83 the security control unit of the mobile station to read the encipherment key which was stored at step S75. In response, the security control unit of the mobile station notifies the radio access control unit of the stored encipherment key at step S84.
Then, the radio access control unit of the mobile station sends an encipherment response to the radio access control unit of the network at step S85. The encipherment response indicates that the mobile station will encipher messages to be sent in accordance with the type of encipherment procedure (B) selected at the network and the encipherment key prepared at the mobile station. Afterward, at step S86, the radio access control unit starts communication in such a manner that the encipherment is carried out. Upon the reception of the encipherment response, at step S87, the radio access control unit of the network starts communication in such a manner that the encipherment is carried out according to the type of encipherment procedure (B) and the encipherment key prepared at the network.
According to the above-described method, if the user of the mobile station would like to select a level of security, it is possible to select a suitable encipherment procedure or a suitable encipherment procedure and a suitable encipherment key preparation procedure.
In addition, it is possible for the mobile station or the network to select a suitable encipherment procedure or a suitable encipherment key preparation procedure for multimedia service, such as transmission of voice or motion pictures if the communications system permits to transmit them.
Furthermore, if it is necessary to improve encipherment in view of function extension, such as a new service, of the mobile communications system in the future, it will be easy to adopt a new suitable encipherment procedure or a new suitable encipherment key preparation procedure.
Furthermore, if a plurality of mobile communications networks utilize minimal encipherment manners in common, it is possible to communicate under a suitable encipherment manner when mobile stations roam across service areas of mobile communications networks. It is unnecessary that various mobile communications networks utilize all of the encipherment procedures in common: each communications network can execute other unique encipherment procedures.
3.3 Start of Diversity Handover Simultaneously with Access Link Setup
3.3.1 Background of Invention of the Procedure
Start of diversity handover and a setup of an access link are originally different procedures from each other. Therefore, in a conventional usual method, when a mobile station starts communicating, an access link for the mobile station is setup first. Then, when diversity handover is necessary by travelling of the mobile station or another reason, diversity handover is carried out.
However, the mobile station often locates at the position where diversity handover can be carried out when the access link is setup. Even in such a case, diversity handover transition and the access link setup are carried out at different times in the conventional method.
For example, as represented in part (a) of
Additionally, the mobile station often locates at the position where inter-cell diversity handover can be carried out when the access link is setup. For example, as represented in part (a) of
As discussed above, although it is possible to carry out diversity handover at the access link setup, these procedures are carried out at different times: the access link setup should be carried out first, and then diversity handover should be carried out in accordance with prior art.
The access link setup needs a series of information flows transported between the mobile station and the network as illustrated in
According to the above circumstances, a large number of control signals are transported between the mobile station and the network and within the network after the call attempt before diversity handover. Consequently, the system should endure its enormous control burden.
In addition, since the mobile station can use only a single radio access link directly after the access link setup, the transmission power for this access link is strong so as to enlarge interference levels at other radio access links. Therefore, the capacity or the number of channels at the cell may be decreased. The control method described below will resolve the above-mentioned problems.
3.3.2 Outline of the Control Method of Embodiment
In the invented system, the network facilitates diversity handover of a mobile station simultaneously with the access link setup for the mobile station upon a call attempt to or from the mobile station when the mobile station is in a status where it can carry out diversity handover. In addition, the mobile station starts diversity handover simultaneously with the access lid setup. More specifically, upon the call attempt, at least one auxiliary branch are established for facilitating diversity handover in addition to the establishment of the main branch, thereby enabling the mobile station to commence the diversity handover using the plurality of branches.
Part (a) of
3.3.2.1 Start of Intra-Cell Diversity Handover Simultaneously with the Access Link Setup
In
As described above, each mobile station in the system always monitors the reception levels on perch channels corresponding to circumferential zones. Thus, although the mobile station 10 visits the radio zone 11 in part (a) of
Assume that the reception level on the perch channel corresponding to the radio zone 12 is in excess of a threshold. In this case, the mobile station 10 notifies the network that the perch channel corresponding to the radio zone 12 is a candidate branch for realizing diversity handover.
In addition, assume that the mobile station locates at the diversity handover zone 13, that the network is informed about a new candidate zone for diversity handover, and that the mobile station originates a call attempt. In this case, when the base station controller 30 decides to establish diversity handover branches for the mobile station 10, the base station controller 30 generates an access link setup request and a diversity handover transition request for the mobile station 10 at the same time. According to the requests, the following steps are advanced in the system.
(1) First, in order to establish an access link for the mobile station 10, the functional entity TACFa in the base station controller sends a BEARER SETUP REQUEST INDICATION (ACCESS LINK SETUP request indication) to the functional entity TACFv in the base station controller 30 that controls the base station 21 where the mobile station 10 visits. The BEARER SETUP request indication includes information elements represented in
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, the functional entity TACFv1 sends a message that includes contents of a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication and contents of an INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication to the functional entity BCFr in base station 21. Contents of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication are the same as those represented in
The message including the contents of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication and the INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication is the link setup message, which has been described at section 2.5.3.6.2.1.3.2. Contents of the link setup message are represented in
(3) Next, BCFr sends a message including contents of a RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication and contents of an INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION response confirmation to TACFv1. The RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication is a report indicating that the radio access link (41 in part (a) of
(4) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication and the INTRA-BCFr HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION response confirmation from BCFr1, TACFv1 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request the mobile station 10 to establish the radio access links 41 and 42. The RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST requests indication includes information elements represented in
(5) Then, TACFa in the base station controller 30 sends a message including contents of a HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication and contents of a RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication to TACAF of the mobile station 10. The message requests to establish the radio access link 41, which belongs to the main branch which will be the subject of synchronization later, and the radio access link 42, which is the auxiliary link for diversity handover. The message is the radio bearer setup message, which has been described at section 2.5.2.4.2.3.4.1. Contents of the radio bearer setup message are represented in
(6) Subsequently, TACAFa in the mobile station starts to synchronize process of the TACAFa with process of BCFr1 in the base station with respect to the radio access link of the main branch.
(7) After completion of the synchronization, BCFr1 in the base station 21 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv1 in the base station controller 30 to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(8) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv1 sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in order to report the completion of the access link setup.
Consequently, the access link setup is established and the system state is transited to diversity handover.
3.3.2.2 Start of Inter-Cell Diversity Handover Simultaneously with the Access Link Setup
In
As represented in part (b) of
(1) First, in order to establish an access link for the mobile station 10, TACFa in the base station controller 30 sends a BEARER SETUP request indication (ACCESS LINK SETUP request indication) to TACFv1 in the base station controller 30. The contents of the BEARER SETUP request indication are represented in
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to request to establish the radio access link 41 between the base station 21 and the mobile station 10 and to establish the wired access link between the base station 21 and the base station controller 30. Contents of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication are represented in
(3) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication, BCFr1 starts to establish the radio access link and the wired access link and sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv1 to report that the radio access link. Contents of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication are represented in
(4) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv1 in the base station controller 30 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request the mobile station 10 to establish the radio access link 41 while the base station 21 establishes the radio access link 41. The RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication includes information elements represented in
(5) Next, TACFa in the base station controller 30 sends a BEARER SETUP request indication (ACCESS LINK SETUP request indication) to the functional entity TACFv2 in the base station controller 30 that controls the base station 22 where the mobile station 10 visits. The BEARER SETUP request indication includes information elements represented in
(6) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to request to establish the radio access link 44 between the base station 22 and the mobile station 10 and to establish the wired access link between the base station 22 and the base station controller 30. Contents of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication are represented in
(7) After completion of the setup of the radio access link and the wired access link, BCFr2 in the base station 22 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation represented in
(8) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv2 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication represented in
(9) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication, TACFa sends a message including contents of a HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication and contents of a RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication to TACAF of the mobile station 10. The message requests to establish the radio access link 41, which belongs to the main branch which will be the subject of synchronization later, and the radio access link 44, which is the auxiliary link for diversity handover.
(10) Subsequently, the mobile station 10 starts to synchronize process of the mobile station with process of the base station 21 with respect to the radio access link 41 of the main branch.
(11) After completion of the synchronization, BCFr1 in the base station 21 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv1 in the base station controller 30 to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(12) Then, TACFv1 sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation (ACCESS LINK SETUP response confirmation) to TACFa in order to report the completion of the access link setup.
Consequently, the access link setup is established and the system state is transited to diversity handover.
3.3.3 Operations of Mobile Station and Base Station for the Control Method
3.3.3.1 Operation of Mobile Station
As represented in
Immediately after the completion of setup of the main branch in the above described fashion, the mobile station sets up the auxiliary branch. In this case, the mobile station allots physical resources for the auxiliary branch. Immediately afterward, the mobile station starts to receive signals through the auxiliary branch, thereby commencing diversity combining by virtue of the main and auxiliary branches without synchronization unlike the main branch setup.
As represented in the flowchart, upon the reception of a signal at step S1, the mobile station transits from the signal reception standby state to step S2. At step S2, the mobile station determines whether or not the received signal contains information on the main branch. If the determination is affirmative, the mobile station establishes the main branch at step S3 in accordance with the main branch information.
Next, the mobile station determines whether or not the received signal contains information on the auxiliary branch at step S4. If the determination is affirmative, the mobile station establishes the auxiliary branch at step S5 in accordance with the auxiliary branch information. As represented by the circulation through steps S4 and S5, if a plurality of auxiliary branches are indicated by the received signal, the mobile station establishes all of the auxiliary branches in accordance with the information.
If there is not a next indication of auxiliary branch in the received signal, the determination at step S4 should be negative, so that the mobile station returns to the signal reception standby state.
As will be understood from the above description, if the mobile station receives a message including both of the setup request of the main branch and the additional setup request(s) of the auxiliary branch(es), it establishes all of the branches informed by the message. This operation contributes to the operation represented in
For easy comparison,
Furthermore, since the RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication and the HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication are sent to the mobile station at different times according to the prior art, the mobile station treats received signals according to the flowchart represented in
Unlikely, according to the invented system, one message including information on all of the main branch and auxiliary branch(es) is sent to the mobile station, so that the mobile station establishes all branches. Therefore, the number of signal transmission between the network and the mobile station can be reduced, so that the transition to diversity handover can be achieved efficiently.
3.3.3.2. Operation of Base Station
As already described with reference to
3.4 Diversity Handover Branch Addition Simultaneously with Branch Replacement
3.4.1 Background of Invention of the Procedure
When a mobile station moves from a radio zone to a neighboring radio zone where the available frequency band is different from that of the former zone, branch replacement is carried out. Branch replacement is also carried out to replace the frequency band used by the mobile station with another frequency band if communication quality is deteriorated although the mobile station does not move.
In accordance with prior art, transition to diversity handover is often necessary immediately after the completion of branch replacement.
In accordance with prior art, first, the branch corresponding to cell 1 used by the mobile station is replaced with the branch corresponding to cells 2 and 3, and then, another branch corresponding to cell 3 is added for enabling diversity handover.
However, the branch replacement needs a series of information flows transported between the mobile station and the network as illustrated in
According to the above circumstances, a large number of control signals are transported between the mobile station and the network and within the network for the branch replacement and the diversity handover in progression. Consequently, the system should endure its enormous control burden.
In addition, since the mobile station can use only a single radio access link directly after the branch replacement, the transmission power for this access link is strong so as to enlarge interference levels at other radio access links. Therefore, the capacity or the number of channels at the cell may be decreased.
The above-mentioned problems occur at the situation where the transition to inter-cell diversity handover is possible after the branch replacement as represented in
3.4.2 Diversity Handover Branch Addition Simultaneously with Branch Replacement of Embodiment
According to the embodiment of the system, when it is possible transit to diversity handover at the occurrence of the initiation to branch replacement, the branch structure before the initiation is immediately replaced with the branch structure necessary for diversity handover.
In
In
(1) TACAFa in the base station controller sends a BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv2 in the base station controller in order to establish a branch between the base station controller and the mobile station through the base station in charge of cell 2.
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr2 in the base station in charge of cell 2. The BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication requests to establish a radio access link between the base station in charge of cell 2 and the mobile station and a wired access link between the base station and the base station controller.
(3) After starting the establishment of the radio and wired access links upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication, BCFr2 of the base station for cell 2 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv2 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(4) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv2 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request the mobile station to establish the radio access link between the mobile station and the base station for cell 2.
(5) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication, TACFa sends another BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv3 to request to establish another branch between the base station controller and the mobile station through the base station in charge of cell 3.
(6) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv3 sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr3 in the base station in charge of cell 3. The BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication requests to establish a radio access link between the base station in charge of cell 3 and the mobile station and a wired access link between the base station and the base station controller.
(7) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication, BCFr3 of the base station for cell 3 starts the establishment of the radio and wired access links, and then, sends another RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv3 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(8) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv3 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request the mobile station to establish the radio access link between the mobile station and the base stations for cells 2 and 3.
(9) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication, TACFa sends a message including contents of a NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication and of a HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication to TACAfa in the mobile station. The NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication requests the replacement of main branch while the HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication requests to add an auxiliary branch. With such constituents, the message requests the mobile station to replace a former branch corresponding to cell 1 where frequency f1 is used with a new branch corresponding to cell 2 where frequency f2 is used, and requests the mobile station to add an auxiliary branch corresponding to cell 3 where frequency f2 is used. The message is the handover command message, which has been described at section 2.5.2.4.2.3.4.4. Contents of the message are represented in
(10) Subsequently, the mobile station starts to synchronize process of the mobile station with process of the base station for cell 2 with respect to the main branch.
(11) After completion of the synchronization, BCFr2 in the base station for cell 2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv2 in the base station controller to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(12) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv2 sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in order to report the completion of the access link setup.
(13) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFa in the base station controller sends a BEARER RELEASE request indication to TACFv1 to request to release the access link formerly used by the base station for cell 1 for communicating with the mobile station.
(14) Upon the reception of the BEARER RELEASE request indication, TACFv1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication to BCFr1 in the base station for cell 1 to request to release the radio access link and wired access link formerly used by the base station for cell 1 for communicating with the mobile station.
(15) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication, BCFr1 in the base station for cell 1 releases the radio access link and wired access link formerly used by the base station for cell 1 for communicating with the mobile station, and sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to TACFv1 to report the completion of access link release.
(16) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation, TACFv1 in the base station sends a BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to TACFa to report the completion of access link release.
Therefore, the mobile station can transit to diversity handover using branches corresponding to cells 2 and 3.
An operation of the system when the mobile station can carries out inter-cell diversity handover directly after the branch replacement has been described with reference to
3.4.3 Operations of Mobile Station and Base Station for the Control Method
3.4.3.1 Operation of Mobile Station
As described above, a message including an instruction on the branch replacement and an instruction on the addition of auxiliary branch for diversity handover is sent to the mobile station in the system. Therefore, when the mobile station receives this kind of message from the network, the mobile station carries out the branch replacement and the addition of auxiliary branch for diversity handover. In this case, the same operation as described in section 3.3.3.1 is carried out.
3.4.3.2 Operation of Base Station
As described above, a message including an instruction on the branch replacement and an instruction on the addition of auxiliary branch for intra-cell diversity handover is sent to the base station in the system. Therefore, when the base station receives this kind of message from the network, the base station carries out the branch replacement and the addition of auxiliary branch for diversity handover.
3.5 First Method for Controlling Branch Structure and Frequency Band when a New Call Occurs While Mobile Station Capable of Treating a Plurality of Calls Simultaneously Treats an Existent Call
3.5.1 Background of Invention of the Method
There is provided a mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously. In accordance with prior art, this kind of mobile station is not provided with means for equalizing branch structure and frequency band as to all calls. Different branch structures and different frequency bands are sometimes allocated to calls while the mobile station treats them. Thus, it is necessary for the network to control respective calls with regard to handover of mobile station and transmission power, so that the network should endure an enormous burden with respect to preparation of overheads of messages. The control method described below will resolve the above-mentioned problems.
3.5.2 Embodying Method
As represented in part (a) of
In this case, the branch structure and the frequency band used for the new call (call 2 in
If new call 2 occurs to or from the MS while the MS treats existent call 1 such that diversity reception from BTS1 and BTS2 is carried out at the diversity handover transition state as represented in part (a) of
(1) In order to request to establish an access link for new call 2 via BTS1 where the MS visits, TACFa sends a BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv1 in the base station controller, which controls BTS1.
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr1 in BTS1 to request to establish a radio access link between BTS1 and the MS and a wired access link between BTS1 and the base station controller for new call 2.
(3) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication, BCFr1 in BTS1 starts establishing the requested radio and wired access links, and then, sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv1 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(4) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv1 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link between the MS and BTS1.
(5) On the other hand, in order to request to establish an access link for new call 2 via BTS2, TACFa sends another BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv2 in the base station controller, which controls BTS2.
(6) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr2 in BTS2 to request to establish another radio access link between BTS2 and the MS and another wired access link between BTS2 and the base station controller.
(7) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication, BCFr2 in BTS2 establishes the requested radio and wired access links, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv2 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is completed.
(8) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv2 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link between the MS and BTS2.
(9) By this stage, TACFa has received two RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indications: the first is sent from TACFv1 to request the establishment of the radio access link between the MS and BTS1, and the second is sent from TACFv2 to request the establishment of the radio access link between the MS and BTS2. Upon the reception of the second RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication from TACFv2, TACFa sends a single message including contents of a HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication and of a RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication to TACAFa in the MS. The RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is used for requesting to establish the main branch, which will be the subject of synchronization later, via BTS1. The HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication is used for establishing the auxiliary branch via BTS2 for diversity handover. Thus, the message requests the MS to establish the radio access link of the main branch via BTS1 and the radio access link of the auxiliary branch via BTS2 for new call 2.
(10) Subsequently, the MS starts to synchronize process of the MS with process of the BTS1 with respect to the radio access link of the main branch.
(11) After completion of the synchronization, BCFr1 in BTS1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv1 in the base station controller to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(12) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv1 sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in order to report the completion of the access link setup. Consequently, the MS can use the same diversity handover branches via BTS1 and BTS2 and can use the same frequency f1 for both calls 1 and 2.
3.6 Second Method for Controlling Branch Structure and Frequency Band when a New Call Occurs While Mobile Station Capable of Treating a Plurality of Calls Simultaneously Treats an Existent Call
3.6.1 Background of Invention of the Method
In the above control method described at section 3.5, the branch structure and the frequency band for the new call are equalized with those for the existent call when the new call attempt occurs during communication by the mobile station.
However, if traffic at least one of the branches or at the frequency used for the existent call is congested or another inconvenient situation happens at the occurrence of the new call attempt, it is impossible to allocate the same branch structure or the frequency band to the new call. In this case, the call attempt cannot be accepted. The control methods described below will resolve the above-mentioned problems.
3.6.2 Embodying Methods
The control methods according to embodiments of the invention is carried out when a new call occurs while the mobile station capable of treating a plurality of calls simultaneously treats an existent call and when it is impossible to assign the same branch structure or the same frequency band as for the existent call to the new call by insufficient capacity or another reason. In accordance with the embodiments, at the establishment of the new call, another branch structure or another communication frequency band which can continue both of the existent and new calls is selected, and the selected branch structure or communication frequency band is assigned to both of the existent and new calls.
However, the capacity of BTS2 adjacent to BTS1 is sufficient for the needs of calls 1 and 2. In addition, BTS2 uses the same frequency band f1 as of BTS1. If a diversity branch structure including branches via BTS1 and BTS2 is used for call 1, the transmission power for each branch may be reduced and the capacity of BTS1 can be enhanced to afford call 2 newly.
Accordingly, in the embodying method, the former branch structure for call 1 is replaced with the diversity branch structure including branches via BTS1 and BTS2 at the establishment of call 2 as represented in part (b) of
However, the capacity of BTS2 adjacent to BTS1 is sufficient for the needs of calls 1 and 2. However, BTS2 uses a frequency band f2, which is different from that of BTS1, so that the MS cannot conduct diversity reception by BTS1 and BTS2.
Accordingly, in the embodying method, the former branch structure for call 1 is replaced with another branch structure constituted of only the single branch via BTS2 at the establishment of call 2 as represented in part (b) of
If new call 2 occurs to or from the MS while the MS treats existent call 1 using BTS1 as represented in part (a) of
Then, TACFa determines how to treat all calls, including the new call, for the MS on the basis of the ascertainment. In other words, TACFa in the base station controller determines to allocate the branch structure constituted of the branch between the MS and BTS1 and the branch between the MS and BTS2 to calls 1 and 2 as described above with reference to part (b) of
(1) In order to request to establish an access link for new call 2 via BTS1 where the MS visits, TACFa sends a BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv1-2 in the base station controller, which controls BTS1.
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv1-2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr1-2 in BTS1 to request to establish a radio access link between BTS1 and the MS and a wired access link between BTS1 and the base station controller for call 2.
(3) Additionally, TACFa in the base station controller sends another BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv2-1 in the base station controller, which controls BTS2 in order to request to establish an access link for existent call 1 via BTS2 where the MS visits.
(4) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv2-1 sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr2-1 in BTS2 to request to establish another radio access link between BTS2 and the MS and another wired access link between BTS2 and the base station controller for call 1.
(5) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv1-2, BCFr1-2 in BTS1 starts establishing the requested radio and wired access links, and then, sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv 1-2 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(6) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv1-2 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link for new call 2 between the MS and BTS1.
(7) On the other hand, upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv2-1, BCFr2-1 in BTS2 starts establishing the requested radio and wired access links, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv2-1 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(8) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv2-1 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link for existent call 1 between the MS and BTS2.
(9) In addition, TACFa in the base station controller sends another BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv2-2 in the base station controller, which controls BTS2 in order to request to establish an access link for new call 2 via BTS2 where the MS visits.
(10) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv2-2 sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr2-2 in BTS2 to request to establish another radio access link between BTS2 and the MS and another wired access link between BTS2 and the base station controller for new call 2.
(11) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication, BCFr2-2 in BTS2 starts establishing the requested radio and wired access links, and then, sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv2-2 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(12) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv2-2 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link for call 2 between the MS and BTS2.
(13) By this stage, TACFa has received three RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indications: the first is sent from TACFv1-2 to request the establishment of the radio access link between the MS and BTS1 for new call 2, the second is sent from TACFv2-1 to request the radio access link between the MS and BTS2 for existent call 1, and the third is from TACFv2-2 for the radio access link between the MS and BTS2 for new call 2. Upon the reception of the third RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication from TACFv2-2, TACFa sends a single message including contents of a HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication and of a RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication to TACAFa in the MS. The RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication is used for requesting to establish the main branch for call 2, which will be the subject of synchronization later, via BTS1. The HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication is used for establishing the auxiliary branches via BTS2 for diversity handover of both calls 1 and 2.
(14) Subsequently, the MS starts to synchronize process of the MS with process of the BTS1 with respect to the radio access link of the main branch for new call 2.
(15) After completion of the synchronization, BCFr1-2 in BTS1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv1-2 in the base station controller to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(16) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv1-2 in BTS1 sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in order to report the completion of the access link setup. Consequently, the MS can use the same diversity handover branches via BTS1 and BTS2 and can use the same frequency f1 for both calls 1 and 2.
If new call 2 occurs to or from the MS while the MS treats existent call 1 using BTS1 as represented in part (a) of
Then, TACFa determines how to treat all calls, including the new call, for the MS on the basis of the ascertainment. In other words, TACFa in the base station controller determines to allocate the radio branch between the MS and BTS2 to calls 1 and 2 as described above with reference to part (b) of
(1) In order to request to establish an access link for existent call 1 via BTS2 where the MS visits, TACFa sends a BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv2-1 in the base station controller, which controls BTS2.
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv2-1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr2-1 in BTS2 to request to establish a radio access link between BTS2 and the MS and a wired access link between BTS2 and the base station controller for call 1.
(3) Additionally, TACFa in the base station controller sends another BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv2-2 in the base station controller, which controls BTS2 in order to request to establish an access link for new call 2 via BTS2 where the MS visits.
(4) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv2-2 sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr2-2 in BTS2 to request to establish another radio access link between BTS2 and the MS and another wired access link between BTS2 and the base station controller for call 2.
(5) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv2-1, BCFr2-1 in BTS2 starts establishing the requested radio and wired access links, and then, sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv2-1 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(6) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv2-1 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link for existent call 1 between the MS and BTS2.
(7) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv2-2, BCFr2-2 in BTS2 starts establishing the requested radio and wired access links, and then, sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv2-2 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(8) Upon the reception of the RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv2-2 sends another RADIO BEARER SETW REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link for new call 2 between the MS and BTS2.
(9) TACFa sends a single message including contents of a NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication and of a RADIO BEARER SETUP request indication to TACAFa in the MS. The NON-SOFT HANDOVER BRANCH EXECUTION request indication is used for requesting to replace the existent radio access link via BTS1 with the new branch via BTS2 for existent call 1. The HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication is used for establishing the radio access link via BTS1 for call 2.
(10) Subsequently, the MS starts to synchronize process of the MS with process of the BTS2 with respect to the new radio access link for existent call 1.
(11) Furthermore, the MS starts to synchronize process of the BTS2 with process of the MS with respect to the new radio access link for new call 2.
(12) After completion of the synchronization for call 1, BCFr2-1 in BTS2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv2-1 in the base station controller to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(13) After completion of the synchronization for call 2, BCFr2-2 in BTS2 sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv2-2 in the base station controller to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(14) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation from BCFr2-1, TACFv2-1 sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in the base station controller in order to report that the establishment of the radio access link via BTS2 for existent call 1 is completed.
(15) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation from BCFr2-2, TACFv2-2 sends another BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in the base station controller in order to report that the establishment of the other radio access link via BTS2 for new call 2 is completed.
(16) TACFa thus receives two BEARER SETUP response confirmations from TACFv2-1 and TACFv2-2. Then, it sends a BEARER RELEASE request indication to TACFv1-1 for requesting the former or existent access link for call 1.
(17) Upon the reception of the BEARER RELEASE request indication, TACFv1-1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication to BCFr1-l for requesting to release the former access link via BTS1 for call 1.
(18) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication, BCFr1-1 releases the former access link via BTS1 for call 1, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to report the completion of the access link release.
(19) Next, TACFv1-1 in BTS1 sends a BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to TACFa in the base station controller to report the completion of the access link release. Accordingly, the MS treats calls 1 and 2 using the new branch via BTS2 and frequency f2.
3.7 First Method for Controlling Branch Structure and Frequency Band when a Handover Initiation Occurs While Mobile Station Treats a Plurality of Calls
3.7.1 Background of Invention of the Method
The method described below is intended to resolve a problem involved in a mobile station which can treat a plurality of calls simultaneously. It is possible that a handover initiation occurs for this kind of mobile station while it treats a plurality of calls. In this case, it is possible that different branch structures and different frequency bands are allocated to the calls, respectively, if handover control for each call is independently carried out. Thus, it is necessary for the network to control respective calls with regard to handover of mobile station and transmission power, so that the network should endure an enormous burden with respect to preparation of overheads of messages. The control method described below will resolve the abovementioned problems.
3.7.2 Embodying Method
In accordance with a method according to an embodiment of the present invention, when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls for the reason of the travelling of the mobile station or other situations, a branch structure or a communication frequency band which can continue all of the calls is selected, and the selected branch structure or communication frequency band are assigned to all of the calls commonly.
Accordingly, in the embodying method, handover is carried out such that the branch between the MS and BTS3 is added to the current branch structure and such that calls 1 and 2 are treated by the branch structure including the branch between the MS and BTS1; the branch between the MS and BTS2; and the branch between the MS and BTS3 as represented in part (b) of
However, BTS3 uses a frequency bandf2, which is different from that of BTS1, so that the MS cannot conduct diversity reception by BTS1 and BTS2. Therefore, in the embodying method, the branch structure is replaced with BTS3 for both calls 1 and 2 as represented in part (b) of
(1) TACFa in the base station controller sends a BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv3-1 in the base station controller corresponding to BTS3 in order to establish an access link between BTS3 and the MS for call 1.
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv3-1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr3-1 in BTS3 to request to establish a radio access link between BTS3 and the MS and a wired access link between BTS3 and the base station controller for call 1.
(3) In addition, TACFa in the base station controller sends another BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv3-2 in the base station controller corresponding to BTS3 in order to establish another access link between BTS3 and the MS for call 2.
(4) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv3-2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr3-2 in BTS3 to request to establish another radio access link between BTS3 and the MS and another wired access link between BTS3 and the base station controller for call 2.
(5) In accordance with the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv3-1, BCFr3-1 in BTS3 establishes the requested radio and wired access links for call 1, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv3-1 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is completed.
(6) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv3-1 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link for call 1 between the MS and BTS3.
(7) In accordance with the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv3-2, BCFr3-2 in BTS3 establishes the requested radio and wired access links for call 2, and then, sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv3-2 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is completed.
(8) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation, TACFv3-2 sends another RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link for call 2 between the MS and BTS3.
(9) Then, TACFa sends a HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication to TACAFa in the MS to additionally establish a new radio access link between BTS3 and the MS for calls 1 and 2 without releasing the formerly used radio access links via BTS1 and BTS2 for calls 1 and 2.
(10) In accordance with the HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION request indication, TACAFa completes to establish the additional radio access link between BTS3 and the MS for calls 1 and 2. TACAFa in the MS then sends a HANDOVER BRANCH ADDITION response confirmation to TACFa in the base station controller for notifying of the completion. Consequently, the MS uses the diversity handover branch structure including the branches via BTS1, BTS2, and BTS3 for treating both calls 1 and 2.
(1) TACFa in the base station controller sends a BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv3-1 in the base station controller corresponding to BTS3 in order to establish an access link between BTS3 and the MS for call 1.
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACv3-1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr3-1 in BTS3 to request to establish a radio access link between BTS3 and the MS and a wired access link between BTS3 and the base station controller for call 1.
(3) In addition, TACFa in the base station controller sends another BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv3-2 in the base station controller corresponding to BTS3 in order to establish another access link between BTS3 and the MS for call 2.
(4) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv3-2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr3-2 in BTS3 to request to establish another radio access link between BTS3 and the MS and another wired access lid between BTS3 and the base station controller for call 2.
(5) In accordance with the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv3-1, BCFr3-1 in BTS3 starts to establish the requested radio and wired access links for call 1, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv3.1 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(6) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv3-1 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa in the base station controller to request to establish the radio access link for call 1 between the MS and BTS3.
(7) In accordance with the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv3-2, BCFr3-2 in BTS3 starts to establish the requested radio and wired access links for call 2, and then, sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv3-2 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(8) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication from BCFr3-2, TACFv3-2 sends another RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa to request to establish the radio access link for call 2 between the MS and BTS3.
(9) Upon the reception of the second RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication, TACFa sends a NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication to TACAFa in the MS to request to replace the radio access link via BTS1 with the radio access link via BTS3 for both calls 1 and 2.
(10) In accordance with the NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication, TACAFa in the MS replaces the radio access link, and starts to synchronize process of the mobile station with process of BTS3 for call 1 with respect to the new radio access link.
(11) Furthermore, the MS starts to synchronize process of the mobile station with process of BTS3 for call 2 with respect to the new radio access link.
(12) After completion of the synchronization for call 1, BCFr3-1 in BTS3 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv3-1 in the base station controller to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(13) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation from BCFr3-1, TACFv3-1 sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in order to report the completion of the access link setup.
(14) On the other hand, after completion of the synchronization for call 2, BCFr3-2 in BTS3 sends another BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv3-2 in the base station controller to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(15) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation from BCFr3-2, TACFv3-2 sends another BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in order to report the completion of the access link setup.
(16) TACFa thus receives two BEARER SETUP response confirmations from TACFv3-1 and TACFv3-2. Then, it sends a BEARER RELEASE request indication to TACFv1-1 for requesting the former or existent access link for call 1.
(17) Upon the reception of the BEARER RELEASE request indication, TACFv1-1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication to BCFr1-1 for requesting to release the former access link via BTS1 for call 1.
(18) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication, BCFr1-1 releases the former access link via BTS1 for call 1, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to TACFv1-1 to report the completion of the access link release.
(19) Next, TACFv1-1 in BTS1 sends a BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to TACFa in the base station controller to report the completion of the access link release.
Furthermore, as represented in
3.8 Second Method for Controlling Branch Structure and Frequency Band when a Handover Initiation Occurs While Mobile Station Treats a Plurality of Calls
3.8.1 Background of Invention of the Method
In accordance with the method described at section 3.7, when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls, a branch structure or a communication frequency band which can continue all of the calls is selected, and the selected branch structure or communication frequency band are assigned to all of the calls commonly.
However, it may be impossible to allocate radio resources of the newly visited base station to all calls for the mobile station because of insufficiency of capacity of the base station. In this case, if no countermeasure is taken, all calls should be released.
However, priorities of calls are not necessarily the same as each other: it is possible that a call is an emergency call. Although all calls cannot be maintained, one or more calls being high in priority can be sometimes maintained such that radio resources can be allocated to them. In this case, release of all calls is not reasonable.
The control method described below will resolve the above-mentioned problems.
3.8.2 Embodying Method
In accordance with a method of an embodiment of the present invention, when a trigger of handover occurs to the mobile station which is treating a plurality of calls for the reason of the travelling of the mobile station or other situations, the handover is carried out as follows:
a. A mobile station or a device (e.g., base station controller) in the network determines whether or not there is a branch structure or a frequency band for continuing all calls.
b. When there is not a branch structure which can continue all of the calls or there is not a frequency band which can continue all of the calls, the mobile station or the device recognizes the idle capacity of the newly visited base station available for the mobile station.
c. One or more calls among the treated calls are selected in accordance with priority so that the calls being high in priority can be maintained by the idle capacity. The other calls are released. When a plurality of calls have the same priority, all calls are released or one or more are selected in accordance with another fashion (e.g., by random selection or in accordance with the length of the connecting time) and the others are released.
d. The selected call or calls are handed over to the new branch or the frequency in relation to the idle capacity.
According to the control method, the call(s) of low priority is released to continue the call(s) of high priority, and the handover is carried out for the priority call(s) such that priority calls utilize a common branch structure and a common frequency band if a plurality of priority calls are selected to be continued.
However, the capacity of the BTS3 is too insufficient to continue both calls 1 and 2. More specifically, it will be possible to continue only call 1 of high priority. In addition, the frequency f2 is used by BTS3, so that it is impossible to carry out diversity handover from BTS1 to BTS3.
Accordingly, call 2 being low in priority for the MS is released and call 1 of high priority is controlled to remain and is handed over from the branch via BTS1 to the branch via BTS3 as represented in part (b) of
(1) TACFa in the base station controller sends a BEARER SETUP request indication to TACFv3-1 in the base station controller corresponding to BTS3 in order to establish an access lid between BTS3 and the MS for call 1.
(2) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP request indication, TACFv3-1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication to BCFr3-1 in BTS3 to request to establish a radio access link between BTS3 and the MS and a wired access link between BTS3 and the base station controller for call 1.
(3) In addition, TACFa in the base station controller sends a BEARER RELEASE request indication to TACFv 1-2 in the base station controller corresponding to BTS1 for requesting the access link for lower priority call 2.
(4) Upon the reception of the BEARER RELEASE request indication, TACFV1-2 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication to BCFr1-2 in BTS1 for requesting to release the radio access link between BTS1 and the MS and the wired access link between BTS1 and the base station controller for call 2.
(5) On the other hand, in accordance with the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP request indication from TACFv3-1, BCFr3-1 in BTS3 starts to establish the requested radio and wired access links for call 1, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication to TACFv3-1 in the base station controller to report that the access link setup is proceeding.
(6) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP PROCEEDING request indication, TACFv3-1 sends a RADIO BEARER SETUP REQUEST request indication to TACFa in the base station controller to request to establish the radio access link for call 1 between the MS and BTS3.
(7) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication, BCFr1-2 releases the access link for call 2 via BTS1 for call 1, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to TACFv1-2 to report the completion of the access link release for call 2.
(8) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation, TACFv 1-2 in BTS1 sends a BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to TACFa in the base station controller to report the completion of the access link release for call 2.
(9) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation, TACFa sends a NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXFXUTION request indication to TACAFa in the MS to request to replace the radio access link via BTS1 with the radio access link via BTS3 for the MS.
(10) In accordance with the NON-SOFT HANDOVER EXECUTION request indication, TACAFa in the MS replaces the radio access link, and starts to synchronize process of the mobile station with process of BTS3 for call 1 with respect to the new radio access link.
(11) After completion of the synchronization for call 1, BCFr3-1 in BTS3 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFv3-1 in the base station controller to report the completion of the synchronization on the radio access link.
(12) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER SETUP response confirmation from BCFr3-1, TACFv3-1 sends a BEARER SETUP response confirmation to TACFa in order to report the completion of the access link setup.
(13) Upon the reception of the BEARER SETUP response confirmation from TACFv3-1, TACFa sends another BEARER RELEASE request indication to TACFv1-1 for requesting the former and unnecessary access link for call 1.
(14) Upon the reception of the BEARER RELEASE request indication, TACFv1-1 sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication to BCFr1-1 for requesting to release the former access link via BTS1 for call 1.
(15) Upon the reception of the BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE request indication, BCFr1-1 releases the former access link for call 1 via BTS1 for call 1, and then, sends a BEARER-AND-RADIO-BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to report the completion of the access link release.
(16) Next, TACFv1-1 in BTS1 sends a BEARER RELEASE response confirmation to TACFa in the base station controller to report the completion of the access link release for call 1. Consequently, only call 1 of high priority is continued by the use of the branch via BTS3.
3.9 Method for Handover Wherein the Branch Addition Procedure is Completed Without Confirmation of Synchronization of Branches
3.9.1 Background of Invention of the Method
In conventional mobile communications system, a handover branch addition procedure is carried out as follows:
(1) A new branch is additionally established between the mobile station and a new base station.
(2) The new base station confirms that the receiving process in the base station is synchronized with the radio signals from the mobile station.
(3) The new base station reports to the base station controller about the completion of the synchronization.
(4) The branch addition procedure is completed.
However, as described above, a necessary communication quality is sometimes obtained by a plurality of branches including one or more auxiliary branches added on demand in the present system although minimal transmission power is consumed. In this structure, it is not limited that each branch satisfies the necessary level of the quality. Therefore, sometimes it is impossible to execute synchronization with respect to an auxiliary branch for which the transmission power is low.
Accordingly, if the conventional handover branch addition procedure including above-described steps (1) through (4) is applied to the present system, there is likelihood that it is impossible to confirm the synchronization with respect to a new branch and the branch addition procedure is continued for an unnecessarily long time. The method described below resolves the problems.
3.9.2 Embodying Method
In accordance with the present system, the handover branch addition procedure is completed upon the onset of communicating a layer 3 message without waiting for the confirmation of synchronization for a newly added branch.
Consequently, the base station controller finishes the handover branch addition procedure without waiting for the confirmation of synchronization for the newly added branch although it sends SETUP request indications for the new branch to the base station and mobile station.
Upon the reception of the setup request for the new branch, the mobile station adapts the interior functions and the communication frequency to the new branch, so as to enter the state for receiving signals from the new branch. Then, once the mobile station receives a meaningful signal from the branch, the mobile station starts the diversity combining using with signals received from the new branch and another branch since the new branch can be considered to be established.
Similarly, upon the reception of the setup request for the new branch, the base station adapts the interior functions and the communication frequency to the new branch, so as to enter the state for receiving signals from the new branch. Then, once the base station receives a meaningful signal from the branch, the base station starts to transmit signals via the new branch since it can be considered to be established. At the same time, the base station starts the diversity combining using with signals received from the new branch and another branch if the base station conducts intracell diversity handover. Alternatively, the base station starts to transfer signals received from the new branch to the base station controller so that the base station controller can start the diversity combining using with signals from the base station and another base station if the base station controller conducts inter-cell diversity handover.
The above-described method is applied into various control methods which have been already described before this section. For example,
The same is applied to other diversity handover procedures illustrated in
3.10 Method for Controlling Management of Code Resources
3.10.1 Background of Invention of the Method
In a usual method for controlling management of code resources, code resources are reassigned (calls are rearranged) when a call is originated or ended. However, if code resources are reassigned upon a call occurrence, a long delay of the link establishment occurs. If code resources are reassigned at the end of a call, the control for the reassignment is redundant and causes the increase of a control burden.
There is a mobile communications system wherein an assignable code resource can be divided into a plurality of code resources, and any of the original code resource and the divided code resources can be selected in accordance with the length corresponding to a necessary bandwidth and be assigned to a call. In this system, when the divided code resources are repeated to be assigned and released blithely, the fragmented assignable code resources are dispersed in the code resource space. In order to broaden the bandwidth, an unused code resource having the length corresponding to the necessary bandwidth should be reserved.
Therefore, reassignment of code resources to calls is necessary for rearranging the fragments to reserve unused code resources corresponding to wide bandwidth.
However, if code resources are reassigned upon a call occurrence, a long delay of the link establishment occurs. If code resources are reassigned at the end of a call, the control for the reassignment is redundant and causes the increase of a control burden since the next call is not necessarily a wide band call.
The selection of trigger timing for reassigning code resources (for rearranging calls) is an important consideration for improving operability and reducing the system burden.
It is an object of the mobile communications system, base station, base station controller, and method for controlling thereof to optimize the trigger timing for reassigning code resources, to reduce the number of reassignments, and to minimize the delay of the link setup.
3.10.2 Embodying Method
In addition, with respect to upper levels, a code resource at a node is available if all of the lower leaves and the upper node are not used. More specifically, with respect to a node N1, the lower leaves CR5-15 and CR5-16 and the upper node N2 are not used, so that the code resource CR4-8 at the node N1 is available.
The reason for the above-mentioned characteristics is because any upper code resource is divided into lower code resources. Therefore, the bandwidth relationship can be expressed by the following equation.
WCR1=2×(WCR2)=4×(WCR3)=8×(WCR4)=16×(WCR5)
where WCR1 is the bandwidth corresponding to the code resource CR1 at level 1, WCR2 is the bandwidth corresponding to code a resource CR2 at level 2, WCR3 is the bandwidth corresponding to code a resource CR3 at level 3, WCR4 is the bandwidth corresponding to code a resource CR4 at level 4, and WCR5 is the bandwidth corresponding to code a resource CR5 at level 5. Therefore, for example, the bandwidth WCR4 corresponding to a code resource CR4 at level 4 can be utilized by two code resources CR5 at level 5.
In the state shown in
In order to use a code resource CR3 at level 3, it is necessary to use other code resources instead of the used code resources at levels 4 or 5 below the subject code resource CR3 as represented in
For this purpose, the radio base station determines whether a code resource corresponding to a necessary bandwidth can be availed or not. The base station controller reassigns the code resources on the bases of the determination.
More specifically, when the radio base station determines that code resource CR3-4 cannot be reserved, the base station controller assigns the unused code resource CRS-9 instead of the used code resource CR5-11 being of the same length at step S1. In addition, the base station controller assigns the unused code resource CR4-7 instead of the used code resource CR4-6 being of the same length at step S2. Thus, the code resource CR3-4 can be reserved.
As described above, the selection of trigger timing for reassigning code resources (for rearranging calls) is an important consideration for reducing the system burden. In the embodying method, once all available code resources corresponding to a preselected bandwidth are assigned, the reassignment is started.
More specifically, assume that the code resource CR3 at level 3 is selected as a standard code resource that is the longest assignable code resource corresponding to the usable widest bandwidth. Simultaneously, the bandwidth corresponding to the code resource CR3 at level 3 is selected as a standard bandwidth. Once all standard code resources CR3 cannot be assigned as represented in
As described above, it is possible to reduce the number of reassignments and to minimize the delay of the link setup, whereby service quality and operability given to the user can he improved.
| Number | Date | Country | Kind |
|---|---|---|---|
| 9-123782 | Apr 1997 | JP | national |
This is a division of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/396,103, filed Mar. 30, 2006, pending, which is a division of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/403,431, filed Feb. 23, 2000, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,236,787, which is a national stage of International application number PCT/JP98/01906, filed Apr. 24, 1998, and which also claims priority of Japanese application number Hei 9-123782, filed Apr. 24, 1997, all of which applications are incorporated herein by reference.
| Number | Name | Date | Kind |
|---|---|---|---|
| 4592745 | Rex et al. | Jun 1986 | A |
| 4670899 | Brody et al. | Jun 1987 | A |
| 4865591 | Sams | Sep 1989 | A |
| 4883472 | Michel | Nov 1989 | A |
| 4893339 | Bright et al. | Jan 1990 | A |
| 4946446 | Vadher | Aug 1990 | A |
| 4973318 | Holm et al. | Nov 1990 | A |
| 4975952 | Mabey et al. | Dec 1990 | A |
| 5017190 | Simon et al. | May 1991 | A |
| 5081641 | Kotzin et al. | Jan 1992 | A |
| 5081679 | Dent | Jan 1992 | A |
| 5084060 | Freund et al. | Jan 1992 | A |
| 5095531 | Ito | Mar 1992 | A |
| 5101501 | Gilhousen et al. | Mar 1992 | A |
| 5109390 | Gilhousen et al. | Apr 1992 | A |
| 5114406 | Gabriel et al. | May 1992 | A |
| 5146498 | Smith | Sep 1992 | A |
| 5181200 | Harrison | Jan 1993 | A |
| 5189734 | Bailey et al. | Feb 1993 | A |
| 5267261 | Blakeney et al. | Nov 1993 | A |
| 5273544 | van der Wal | Dec 1993 | A |
| 5279579 | D'Amico | Jan 1994 | A |
| 5279585 | Harris | Jan 1994 | A |
| 5292314 | D'Alession et al. | Mar 1994 | A |
| 5295976 | Harris | Mar 1994 | A |
| 5299199 | Wilson et al. | Mar 1994 | A |
| 5309501 | Kozik et al. | May 1994 | A |
| 5319712 | Finkelstein et al. | Jun 1994 | A |
| 5320609 | Haber et al. | Jun 1994 | A |
| 5329573 | Chang et al. | Jul 1994 | A |
| 5336183 | Greelis et al. | Aug 1994 | A |
| 5338311 | Mahurkar | Aug 1994 | A |
| 5370629 | Michel et al. | Dec 1994 | A |
| 5416778 | Chan et al. | May 1995 | A |
| 5423065 | Pinard | Jun 1995 | A |
| 5452471 | Leopold et al. | Sep 1995 | A |
| 5472430 | Vaillancourt et al. | Dec 1995 | A |
| 5487065 | Acampora et al. | Jan 1996 | A |
| 5487174 | Persson | Jan 1996 | A |
| 5491837 | Haartsen | Feb 1996 | A |
| 5496293 | Huggenberger | Mar 1996 | A |
| 5499397 | Wadin et al. | Mar 1996 | A |
| 5504935 | Vercauteren | Apr 1996 | A |
| 5513245 | Mizikovsky et al. | Apr 1996 | A |
| 5514097 | Knauer | May 1996 | A |
| 5527294 | Weatherford et al. | Jun 1996 | A |
| 5548820 | Victorin | Aug 1996 | A |
| 5549558 | Martin | Aug 1996 | A |
| 5549575 | Giambattista et al. | Aug 1996 | A |
| 5566356 | Taketsugu | Oct 1996 | A |
| 5573510 | Isaacson | Nov 1996 | A |
| 5574974 | Almgren et al. | Nov 1996 | A |
| 5582598 | Chanoch | Dec 1996 | A |
| 5590133 | Billstrom et al. | Dec 1996 | A |
| 5591136 | Gabriel | Jan 1997 | A |
| 5591138 | Vaillancourt | Jan 1997 | A |
| 5593390 | Castellano et al. | Jan 1997 | A |
| 5609577 | Haber et al. | Mar 1997 | A |
| 5625627 | Ishi | Apr 1997 | A |
| 5625876 | Gilhousen et al. | Apr 1997 | A |
| 5634206 | Reed et al. | May 1997 | A |
| 5640414 | Blakeney, II et al. | Jun 1997 | A |
| 5643214 | Marshall et al. | Jul 1997 | A |
| 5657375 | Connolly et al. | Aug 1997 | A |
| 5658259 | Pearson et al. | Aug 1997 | A |
| 5661806 | Nevoux et al. | Aug 1997 | A |
| 5663990 | Bolgiano et al. | Sep 1997 | A |
| 5670964 | Dent | Sep 1997 | A |
| 5673259 | Quick, Jr. | Sep 1997 | A |
| 5674204 | Chanoch | Oct 1997 | A |
| 5675628 | Hokkanen | Oct 1997 | A |
| 5679111 | Hjertman et al. | Oct 1997 | A |
| 5710986 | Obayashi et al. | Jan 1998 | A |
| 5711008 | Gallant et al. | Jan 1998 | A |
| 5717762 | Aihara et al. | Feb 1998 | A |
| 5725508 | Chanoch et al. | Mar 1998 | A |
| 5727064 | Reeds, III | Mar 1998 | A |
| 5728074 | Castellano et al. | Mar 1998 | A |
| 5743889 | Sams | Apr 1998 | A |
| 5749053 | Kusaki et al. | May 1998 | A |
| 5751761 | Gilhousen | May 1998 | A |
| 5754959 | Ueno et al. | May 1998 | A |
| 5790953 | Wang et al. | Aug 1998 | A |
| 5805995 | Jiang et al. | Sep 1998 | A |
| 5807346 | Frezza | Sep 1998 | A |
| 5832368 | Nakano et al. | Nov 1998 | A |
| 5878036 | Spartz et al. | Mar 1999 | A |
| 5886988 | Yun et al. | Mar 1999 | A |
| 5887021 | Keskitalo et al. | Mar 1999 | A |
| 5898928 | Karlsson et al. | Apr 1999 | A |
| 5912886 | Takahashi et al. | Jun 1999 | A |
| 5918181 | Foster et al. | Jun 1999 | A |
| 5920814 | Sawyer et al. | Jul 1999 | A |
| 5924030 | Rautiola et al. | Jul 1999 | A |
| 5924042 | Sakamoto et al. | Jul 1999 | A |
| 5940381 | Freeburg et al. | Aug 1999 | A |
| 5963865 | Desgagne et al. | Oct 1999 | A |
| 5970406 | Komara | Oct 1999 | A |
| 5978678 | Houde et al. | Nov 1999 | A |
| 5983117 | Sandler et al. | Nov 1999 | A |
| 6009328 | Muszynski | Dec 1999 | A |
| 6032050 | Hasegawa | Feb 2000 | A |
| 6039624 | Holmes | Mar 2000 | A |
| 6070084 | Hamabe | May 2000 | A |
| 6075990 | Shin | Jun 2000 | A |
| 6081600 | Blanchard et al. | Jun 2000 | A |
| 6094575 | Anderson et al. | Jul 2000 | A |
| 6108548 | Furukawa et al. | Aug 2000 | A |
| 6144861 | Sundelin et al. | Nov 2000 | A |
| 6157723 | Schultz | Dec 2000 | A |
| 6167279 | Chang et al. | Dec 2000 | A |
| 6178337 | Spartz et al. | Jan 2001 | B1 |
| 6246878 | Wallentin | Jun 2001 | B1 |
| 6249681 | Virtanen | Jun 2001 | B1 |
| 6301478 | Wallstedt et al. | Oct 2001 | B1 |
| 6366568 | Bolgiano et al. | Apr 2002 | B1 |
| 6546252 | Jetzek et al. | Apr 2003 | B1 |
| 6600903 | Lilja et al. | Jul 2003 | B1 |
| RE39381 | Hakkinen et al. | Nov 2006 | E |
| 7212820 | Persson et al. | May 2007 | B2 |
| 7236787 | Tamura et al. | Jun 2007 | B1 |
| Number | Date | Country |
|---|---|---|
| 2 111 703 | Oct 1993 | CA |
| 2 193 506 | Nov 1996 | CA |
| 2 206 063 | Dec 1997 | CA |
| 1135150 | Nov 1996 | CN |
| 3 638 984 | Nov 1986 | DE |
| 3 645 245 | Nov 1986 | DE |
| 3 900 926 | Aug 1989 | DE |
| WP 4 223 958 | Jul 1992 | DE |
| 0 037 696 | Mar 1981 | EP |
| 0 245 312 | Oct 1986 | EP |
| 0 268 191 | Nov 1987 | EP |
| 0 298 067 | Jun 1988 | EP |
| 0 327 910 | Jan 1989 | EP |
| 0 373 321 | Jun 1990 | EP |
| 0 496 141 | Jan 1991 | EP |
| 0 516 473 | May 1992 | EP |
| 0 498 737 | Aug 1992 | EP |
| 0 544 460 | Jun 1993 | EP |
| 0 554 995 | Aug 1993 | EP |
| 0 594 349 | Apr 1994 | EP |
| 0 627 229 | May 1994 | EP |
| 0 675 615 | Oct 1995 | EP |
| 0 714 180 | May 1996 | EP |
| 0 768 804 | Apr 1997 | EP |
| 0 779 755 | Jun 1997 | EP |
| 2701211 | Aug 1994 | FR |
| 02-192231 | Jul 1990 | JP |
| 6-045991 | Feb 1994 | JP |
| 9-051575 | Feb 1994 | JP |
| 6-069880 | Mar 1994 | JP |
| 6-078359 | Mar 1994 | JP |
| 07-007469 | Jan 1995 | JP |
| 7-074694 | Mar 1995 | JP |
| 7-087567 | Mar 1995 | JP |
| 7-184251 | Jul 1995 | JP |
| 7-245784 | Sep 1995 | JP |
| 7-250371 | Sep 1995 | JP |
| 7-303090 | Nov 1995 | JP |
| 8-205232 | Aug 1996 | JP |
| 9-051075 | Feb 1997 | JP |
| 9-065425 | Mar 1997 | JP |
| 09-121388 | May 1997 | JP |
| 9-224276 | Aug 1997 | JP |
| 9-508773 | Sep 1997 | JP |
| 9-327072 | Dec 1997 | JP |
| WO 8702895 | May 1987 | WO |
| WO 9110460 | Jul 1991 | WO |
| WO 9305835 | Aug 1992 | WO |
| WP 9218179 | Oct 1992 | WO |
| WO 9316740 | Sep 1993 | WO |
| WO 9409841 | May 1994 | WO |
| WO 9415210 | Jul 1994 | WO |
| WO 9430024 | Dec 1994 | WO |
| WO 9501812 | Jan 1995 | WO |
| WO 9504563 | Feb 1995 | WO |
| WO 9508897 | Mar 1995 | WO |
| WO 95-32594 | Nov 1995 | WO |
| WO 9607443 | Mar 1996 | WO |
| WO 9629837 | Sep 1996 | WO |
| WO 9708910 | Mar 1997 | WO |
| WO 9713353 | Apr 1997 | WO |
| WO 9729596 | Aug 1997 | WO |
| Entry |
|---|
| US Office Action in U.S. Appl. No. 09/403,431, issued Nov. 29, 2005, 12 pages. |
| US Office Action issued in connection with U.S. Appl. No. 11/397,975, dated Feb. 26, 2008, 6 pages. |
| US Office Action issued in connection with U.S. Appl. No. 11/396,103, dated Oct. 17, 2008, 11 pages. |
| US Office Action issued Apr. 23, 2008 in U.S. Appl. No. 11/712,539, 12pages. |
| US Office Action issued Nov. 19, 2008 in U.S. Appl. No. 11/399,674 9 pages. |
| US Final Office Action issued Nov. 19, 2008 in U.S. Appl. No. 11/397,975 7 pages. |
| Canadian Examination Report in Canadian patent application No. 2,411,999, dated Jul. 26, 2006, 3 pages. |
| Canadian Examination Report in Canadian patent application No. 2,412,005, dated Jul. 26, 2006, 3 pages. |
| Canadian Official Action issued in Canadian patent application 2,411,993, 3 pages, dated Oct. 31, 2007. |
| Canadian Official Action issued in Canadian patent application 2,412,005, 3 pages, dated Aug. 23, 2007. |
| Chinese Office Action issued in Chinese counterpart application No. 03141036.7 (6 pages) and English translation thereof (9 pages), dated Jan. 4, 2008. |
| Chinese Office Action issued in Chinese counterpart application No. 98804482.X (4 pages) and English translation thereof (4 pages), dated Feb. 6, 2007. |
| Japanese Office Action issued Jul. 29, 2008 in Japanese patent application No. 2005-208446 (with translation) 4 pages. |
| Japanese Office Action issued Jul. 29, 2008 in Japanese patent application No. 2005-208522 (with translation) 6 pages. |
| Japanese Office Action issued Jul. 29, 2008 in Japanese patent application No. 2005-332100 (with translation) 4 pages. |
| Office Action for Japanese Patent Application No. 2005-208446, dated Mar. 10, 2009 with English translation, 4 pages. |
| Office Action for Japanese Patent Application No. 2008-251763, dated Mar. 10, 2009 with English translation, 4 pages. |
| US Office Action issued Apr. 13, 2009 in U.S. Appl. No. 11/397,382, 8 pages. |
| Office Action from Chinese Application No. 200610166780.2, dated May 22, 2009, 8 pages. |
| Office Action from Co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/396,103, dated Jul. 7, 2009, 11 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/421,197, dated Aug. 31, 2009, 6 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/396,103, dated Dec. 15, 2009, 9 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/397,382, dated Jan. 14, 2010, 8 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl No. 12/421,197, dated Jan. 28, 2010, 6 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/397,382, dated Nov. 2, 2009, 9 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/363,393, dated Jan. 21, 2011, 9 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/397,382, dated Nov. 19, 2010, 9 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/421,197, dated Nov. 22, 2010, 7 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/421,197, dated Apr. 4, 2011, 7 pages. |
| Office Action from counterpart Chinese Application No. 200810146375.3, dated Mar. 9, 2010, 10 pages (with translation). |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/396,103, dated May 3, 2010, 10 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl No. 12/361,346, dated Sep. 24, 2010, 26 pages. |
| Office Action from counterpart U.S. Appl No. 11/397,382, dated Jun. 23, 2010, 8 pages. |
| Office Action from counterpart U.S. Appl. No. 12/367,026, dated Jun. 8, 2010, 8 pages. |
| Office Action from counterpart U.S. Appl. No. 12/421,197, dated Jun. 21, 2010, 6 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/363,393, dated Sep. 16, 2011, 11 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/421,197, dated Sep. 19, 2011, 7 pages. |
| Office Action from counterpart Canadian Application No. 2,412,005, dated Jun. 9, 2010, 2 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/364,766, dated Jun. 27, 2011, 10 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/363,393, dated Dec. 14, 2011, 11 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/364,766, dated Dec. 16, 2011, 11 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/396,103, dated Jan. 6, 2012, 9 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/365,647, dated Jan. 18, 2012, 11 pages. |
| Notice of Allowance from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/421,197, dated Jan. 20, 2012, 8 pages. |
| Hanly, Stephen V., “An Algorithm for Combined Cell-Site Selection and Power Control to Maximize Cellular Spread Spectrum Capacity,” IEEE Journal on Selected Areas in Communications, Sep. 1995, No. 7, pp. 1332-1340. |
| Extended European Search Report for European Application No. 08022255.7, dated Mar. 12, 2012, 8 pages. |
| Notice of Allowance from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/396,103, dated May 3, 2012, 8 pages. |
| Notice of Allowance from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/364,766, dated Aug. 13, 2012, 13 pages. |
| Notice of Allowance from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/365,647, dated May 29, 2012, 17 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/363,393, dated May 30, 2012, 12 pages. |
| Examination Report from European Application No. 08022255.7, dated Nov. 2, 2012, 5 pages. |
| Davis, C.E., “The Livermore Secure-Voice Radio System,” Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 1988 International Carnahan Conference on Security Technology, Oct. 5-7, 1988, pp. 139-144. |
| Lin, Hung-Yu et al., “Authentication Protocols for Personal Communication Systems,” SIGCOMM, Cambridge, MA, © 1995, pp. 256-261. |
| Vedder, Klaus, “Security Aspects of Mobile Communications,” Computer Security and Industrial Cryptography, State of the Art and Evolution, Leuven, Belgium, May 21-23, 1991, 20 pages. |
| Partial European Search Report for European Application No. 07014165.0, dated Apr. 5, 2013, 6 pages. |
| Extended European Search Report for European Application No. 07014167.6, dated Apr. 25, 2013, 6 pages. |
| Extended European Search Report for European Application No. 07014166.8, dated Apr. 29, 2013, 6 pages. |
| Extended European Search Report for European Application No. 07014055.3, dated May 6, 2013, 6 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 11/397,382, dated Jun. 19, 2013, 19 pages. |
| Office Action from co-pending U.S. Appl. No. 12/363,393, dated Aug. 1, 2013, 13 pages. |
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| 20090154702 A1 | Jun 2009 | US |
| Number | Date | Country | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Parent | 11396103 | Mar 2006 | US |
| Child | 12366384 | US | |
| Parent | 09403431 | US | |
| Child | 11396103 | US |
